SERVICE MANUAL Published in Apr ’06 3KK70760 DP-710/JS-710 PF-710/750 DF-730 Fax System (N)
SERVICEMANUAL
Published in Apr ’063KK70760
DP-710/JS-710PF-710/750
DF-730Fax System (N)
CAUTION
DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
ATTENTION
IL Y A DANGER D’EXPLOSION S’IL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE. REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MÊME TYPE OU D’UN TYPE REC-OMMANDÉ PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RÉBUT LES BATTERIES USAGÉES CON-FORMÉMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.
Revision history
Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety oftheir customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnelare advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautionsdescribed here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrectcompliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliancewith warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrectcompliance with warning messages using this symbol.
SymbolsThe triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific pointof attention is shown inside the symbol.
General warning.
Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action.
Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required.
Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.
1.Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is adequate for the rated current. .............................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities. ............................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .......
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ................• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.
This may cause fire. .........................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ...........
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ...............................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ...........................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is acciden-tally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immedi-ately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical attention. ......................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s instruction handbook. .....................................................................................................................
2.Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ...............
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures. .......................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective circuits. .....................................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related bro-
chure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident. ..........................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. .............• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ..............................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may damage eyesight. ...........................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly. ............................................................................................................
CAUTION• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are
safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ..........................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ....................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing them; always hold the plug itself. .....................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item. .............................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ....................................• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector, trapped wire and missing screws. ...................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: .....................................· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire in a furnace, etc. .......................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet imme-diately. ............................................................................................................................................
3.Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. .....................................................................................
DP-710
3J9
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-11-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-21-1-3 Machine cross section ............................................................................................................................1-1-3
1-2 Installation1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-11-2-2 Unpacking ...............................................................................................................................................1-2-2
(1) Unpacking .........................................................................................................................................1-2-2(2) Removing tapes and spacer..............................................................................................................1-2-3
1-3 Maintenance Mode1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1(2) Maintenance mode item list...............................................................................................................1-3-2(3) Contents of maintenance mode items...............................................................................................1-3-3
1-4 Troubleshooting1-4-1 Original misfeed detection ......................................................................................................................1-4-1
(1) Original misfeed indication ................................................................................................................1-4-1(2) Original misfeed detection conditions................................................................................................1-4-1(3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-3
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-4-5(1) Self-diagnostic function .....................................................................................................................1-4-5(2) Self diagnostic codes ........................................................................................................................1-4-5
1-4-3 Electric problems ....................................................................................................................................1-4-61-4-4 Mechanical problems ..............................................................................................................................1-4-7
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1
(1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-11-5-2 Original feed section ...............................................................................................................................1-5-2
(1) Detaching and refitting the DP forwarding pulley and DP feed pulley...............................................1-5-2(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley ..............................................................................1-5-3
2-1 Mechanical construction2-1-1 Original feed section ...............................................................................................................................2-1-12-1-2 Original switchback section.....................................................................................................................2-1-2
(1) Operation of original switchback .......................................................................................................2-1-32-1-3 Original conveying section ......................................................................................................................2-1-4
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1
(1) PWBs ................................................................................................................................................2-2-1(2) Switches and sensors .......................................................................................................................2-2-2(3) Motors ...............................................................................................................................................2-2-3(4) Clutches and solenoids .....................................................................................................................2-2-4
2-3 Operation of the PWBs2-3-1 DP driver PWB........................................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 AppendixesTiming chart No.1....................................................................................................................................2-4-1Timing chart No.2....................................................................................................................................2-4-2Timing chart No.3....................................................................................................................................2-4-3Timing chart No.4....................................................................................................................................2-4-4List of maintenance parts........................................................................................................................2-4-5Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-4-6Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-8
3J9
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 SpecificationsType ................................................Machine mounted type duplex sheet-through document feederOriginal feed system .......................Automatic feedOriginals..........................................SheetsOriginal weights ..............................Single-sided original mode: 45 - 160 g/m2
Double-sided original mode: 50 - 120 g/m2
Original paper .................................Plain paper, thermal paper, art paper and colored paperOriginal sizes ..................................A3 - A5R, folio/11" x 17" - 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"No. of originals................................Up to 70 sheets (B4/8 1/2" x 14" or larger)
Up to 100 sheets (A4/11" x 8 1/2" or smaller)Up to 30 sheets in the auto selection mode
Original processing speed ..............Original replacement: Max. 32 sheets/min (A4/11" x 8 1/2")Original scanning: 150 mm/s (100%)
Power source..................................Electrically connected to the machine (5 V DC and 24 V DC)Dimensions .....................................571 (W) x 488 (D) x 134 (H) mm
22 1/2" (W) x 19 3/16" (D) x 5 1/4" (H)
Figure 1-1-1
Weight.............................................Approx. 11.5 kg/Approx. 25.3 lbs
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
ab
c
a: 571 mm/22 1/2”b: 488 mm/19 3/16”c: 134 mm/5 1/4”
1-1-1
3J9
1-1-2 Parts names
Figure 1-1-2
1 3 62
5
4
1. Original table2. Original width guides3. Original eject table4. Document processor cover5. Original loaded indicator6. Cleaning cloth compartment
1-1-2
3J9
1-1-3 Machine cross section
Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section
Paper and original path
1. Original feed section2. Original switchback section3. Original conveying section
1-1-3
3J9
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-1-4
3J9
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment1. Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.)
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photo-conductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams.Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto the machine.Avoid dust and vibration.Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°).Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photo-conductor, such as mer-cury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.Select a room with good ventilation.
1-2-1
3J9
1-2-2 Unpacking(1) Unpacking
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking
Caution: Place the machine on a level surface.
1. Document processor2. Outer case3. Stay4. Bottom pad5. Spacer6. Original mat7. Front pad
8. Rear upper pad9. Rear lower pad10. Plastic sheet11. Spacer12. Plastic bag13. Installation guide14. Bar code labels
1-2-2
3J9
(2) Removing tapes and spacer
Procedure1. Remove two tapes and then remove the air
cap.2. Remove two tapes and spacer.
Figure 1-2-2
Air cap
Tepe
Tepe
Tepe
Tepe
Spacer
1-2-3
3J9
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-2-4
3J9
1-3 Maintenance Mode
1-3-1 Maintenance modeThe machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys.
Enter 001 using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys
and press the start key.
Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys
or numeric keys.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Press the start key.
Start
End
Maintenance mode is entered.
The maintenance item is selected.
Maintenance mode is exited.
Repeat the same maintenance item?
Run another maintenance item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
1-3-1
3J9
(2) Maintenance mode item list
Section ItemNo. Content of maintenance item Initial
setting*
Optical U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP 0/0*1
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification 0*1
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0/0*1
U072 Adjusting the DP center line 0/0/0*1
U076 Executing DP automatic adjustment -U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation 200/200/200*1
Operationpanel andsupportequipment
U203 Operating the DP separately -U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors -
U244 Checking the DP switches -Mode setting U263 Setting the paper ejection when copying from the DP NORMAL*1,*2
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication ON*1
Imageprocessing
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0*1
Other U905 Checking counts by optional devices -
*Initial setting for executing U020, *1: The item initialized for executing U020, *2: The item initialized for executing U021
1-3-2
3J9
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenanceitem No. Description
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DPDescriptionAdjusts the position for scanning originals from the document processor. Performs the test copy at the four scanning positions after adjusting.PurposeUsed when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the document proces-sor is used. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select ADJUST DATA of the screen for selecting an item.3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
When the setting value is increased, the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to the left when the setting value is decreased.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.5. Select TEST POSITION of the screen for selecting an item.6. Select the Scanning position using the cursor up/down keys.7. Press the start key. The value is set.8. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the document processor and press the interrupt key.
The screen for the test copy mode is displayed.9. Press the start key. Test copy is executed.10. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check that no
black line appears and the image is normally scanned.CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Display Description Setting range
Default setting
Change invalue per step
ADJUST DATA Starting position adjustment for scanning originals
-40 to 32 0 0.09 mm
TEST POSITION Scanning position for the test copy originals
0 to 3 0 -
1-3-3
3J9
U070 Adjusting the DP magnificationDescriptionAdjusts the DP original scanning speed.PurposeMake the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the optional DP is used.Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the interrupt key.3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.4. Change the setting value using the cursor up/down keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value.For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Figure 1-3-15. Press the start key. The value is set.
CautionCheck the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Description Settingrange
Initialsetting
Change invalue per step
Original conveying motor speed -25 to 25 0 0.1 %
Original Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
U070 U071(P.1-3-5)
U404(P.1-3-13)
1-3-4
3J9
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timingDescriptionAdjusts the DP original scanning timing.PurposeMake the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used.Adjustment
1. Press the start key.2. Select the item using the exposure adjustment keys.
3. Press the interrupt key.4. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.5. Change the setting value using the cursor up/down keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value of exp.1.For copy example 2, decrease the value of exp.1.
Figure 1-3-26. Press the start key. The value is set.
CautionCheck the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display Description Settingrange
Initialsetting
Change invalue per step
ADJUST DATA1 DP leading edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.19 mmADJUST DATA2 DP trailing edge registration -32 to 32 0 0.19 mm
Original Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
U071 U404(P.1-3-13)
1-3-5
3J9
U072 Adjusting the DP center lineDescriptionAdjusts the scanning start position for the DP original.PurposeMake the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used.Adjustment
1. Press the start key.2. Select the item.
3. Press the interrupt key.4. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.5. Change the setting value using the cursor up/down keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value.For copy example 2, decrease the value.
Figure 1-3-36. Press the start key. The value is set.
CautionCheck the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display Description Settingrange
Initialsetting
Change invalue per step
DATA(simplex) DP center line (simplex mode) -78 to 78 0 0.17 mmDATA(duplex 1) DP center line (duplex mode) -78 to 78 0 0.17 mmDATA(duplex 2) DP center line (duplex mode) -78 to 78 0 0.17 mm
Original Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Reference
U072 U404(P.1-3-13)
1-3-6
3J9
U076 Executing DP automatic adjustmentDescriptionUses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the DP scanning section.Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)Adjusting the DP scanning timing (U071)Adjusting the DP center line (U072)When you run this maintenance mode, the preset values of U070, U071 and U072 will also be updated.PurposeTo perform automatic adjustment of various items in the DP scanning section.RemarksCut a trail edge of a specified original (part number: 2AC68241) as shown in a figure.
Figure 1-3-4
Method1. Press the start key. 2. Set a specified original (part number: 2A068021) in the DP.3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is dis-
played.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
128 1mm+- +-60 1mm
Cut with the edge of black belt.
Display DescriptionCONVEY SPEED DP magnification in the auxiliary scanning directionLEAD EDGE ADJ DP leading edge registrationTRAIL EDGE ADJ DP trailing edge registrationDP CENTER DP original center line
1-3-7
3J9
U076 If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.If stop/ during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
U087 Setting DP reading position modification operationDescriptionSets the black line inspection at the time of reading the original from the DP.PurposeWhen using optional DP, to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to original reading position.Method
1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be set. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting: standard data when dust is detected1. Change the value using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.Setting: Initialization of original reading position
1. Select CLEAR.2. Press the start key. The setting is cleared.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Code Description61 Sub scan maginification is above the ± 2.5%62 Leading timing is above ± 3.2mm63 Trailing timing is above ± 3.2mm64 The gap of sub scan direction is above ± 1.5mm65 The gap of the center line is above ± 3.2mm67 The gap of main scanning direction is above ± 1.5mm68 The leading black edge of the adjustment original is not detected.69 The trailing black edge of the adjustment original is not detected.6a The right edge black edge of the adjustment original is not detected.6b The left edge black edge of the adjustment original is not detected.6f Timeout occurred when reading out from memory.
Display DescriptionCCD Setting of standard data when dust is detected.BLACK Initialization of original reading position.
Display Description Setting range Defaultsetting
CCD R Lowest density of the R regard as the dust. 0 to 255 200
CCD G Lowest density of the G regard as the dust. 0 to 255 200
CCD B Lowest density of the B regard as the dust. 0 to 255 200
1-3-8
3J9
U203 Operating the DP separatelyDescriptionSimulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional DP.PurposeTo check the DP operation.Method
1. Press the start key.2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.3. Select the item to be operated. The operation starts.
4. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.CompletionPress the stop/clear key when the operation stops.The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionADP With paper, single-sided originalRADP With paper, double-sided originalADP (NON P) Without paper, single-sided original (continuous operation)RADP (NON P) Without paper, double-sided original (continuous operation)
1-3-9
3J9
U243 Checking the operation of the DP motorsDescriptionTurns the motors, solenoids or clutch in the document processor on.PurposeTo check the operation of the document processor motors, solenoids and clutch.Method
1. Press the start key.2. Select the item to be operated. The operation starts.
3. To turn each motor off, press the stop/clear key.CompletionPress the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U244 Checking the DP switchesDescriptionDisplays the status of the respective switches in the document processor.PurposeTo check if respective switches in the document processor operate correctly.Start
1. Press the start key.2. Select the type of switches (SW or VR) to be checked. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
Method for the on/off switches (SW)1. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status.
If the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse.
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display Motors, solenoids and clutch OperationF MOT Original feed motor (OFM) In operationC MOT Original paper conveying motor (OCM) In operationFD CL Original feed clutch (OFCL) On for 0.5 sEJ SL Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) On for 0.5 sRJ SL Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) On for 0.5 sFD SL Original feed solenoid (OFSOL) On and offRP SL Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) On and off
Display DescriptionSW On/off switchesVR Volume switch
Display DescriptionSET SW Original set switch (OSSW)FEED SW Original feed switch (OFSW)REV SW Original switchback switch (OSBSW)TMG SW DP timing switch (DPTSW)SZ A SW Original size length switch (OSLSW)
1-3-10
3J9
U244 Method for the volume switch (VR)1. Move the original insertion guides to check the detection status of the original size width switch.
The detected original width is displayed as a numerical value with the decimals omitted.
For example, if any value between 105 and 139 is displayed when the original insertion guides are adjusted for A4R paper, it indicates that the original width is detected correctly.
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Numerical
value
A5R
B5R
Folio/A4R
B4/B5
CF (11" x 15")
A3/A4
Original width to be detected
51/2" x 81/2"
81/2" x 14"/
81/2" x 11"
11" x 17"/
11" x 15"/
11" x 81/2"
000
49.664
50.176
61.440
61.952
103.936
104.448
139.264
139.776
146.432
146.994
197.120
197.632
197.720
223.232
256
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
1-3-11
3J9
U263 Setting the paper ejection when copying from the DPDescriptionSets whether the copies will be ejected in the same or opposite order as the originals when copying from the document processor.PurposeSet according to the preference of the user.Setting
1. Press the start key.2. Select the ejection order.
Initial setting: FACE-DOWN3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indicationDescriptionSets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line.PurposeDisplays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the contact glass when scanning from the DP.Setting
1. Press the start key.2. Select ON or OFF.
Initial setting: ONSetting count value is displayed only if the setting is ON.
3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionFACE-DOWN (NOMAL) Face down ejectionFACE-UP (SPEED) Face up ejection with bitmap copyFACE-UP (MEMORY) Face up ejection with memory copy
Display DescriptionON Displays the cleaning guidanceOFF Not to display the cleaning guidance
1-3-12
3J9
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DPDescriptionAdjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP.PurposeMake the adjustment if margins are incorrect when the DP is used.CautionBefore making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode
Adjustment1. Press the start key.2. Select the item.
3. Press the interrupt key.4. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.5. Change the setting value using the zoom +/- keys.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
Figure 1-3-56. Press the start key. The value is set.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
U403(See the service manual
for the machine.)
U402(See the service manual
for the machine.))U404
Display Description Settingrange
Initialsetting
Change invalue per step
A MARGIN Left margin 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mmB MARGIN Leading edge margin 0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mmC MARGIN Right margin 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mmD MARGIN Trailing edge margin 0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
Leading edge margin
(3.5±0.5mm)
Ejection direction(reference)
Trailing edge margin
(2.0±1.0mm)
Left margin(2.0±1.0mm)
Right margin
(2.0±1.0mm)
1-3-13
3J9
U905 Checking counts by optional devicesDescriptionDisplays or clears the counts of optional DP or finisher.PurposeTo check the use of optional DP and finisher. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.Method
1. Press the start key.2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed.
DP
FINISHER (3000-sheet document finisher or document finisher)
When installing the document finisher, value of CP CNT and STAPLE are displayed.CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionADP Number of single-sided originals that has passed through the DPRADP Number of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
Display DescriptionCP CNT Number of copies that has passedSTAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activatedPUNCH Frequency the punch has been activatedSTACK Frequency the stacker has been activatedSADDLE Frequency the center holding has been activated
1-3-14
3J9
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Original misfeed detection
(1) Original misfeed indication
When an original jams, the machine immediately stops operation and a message is shown on the machine operationpanel. The DP original set indicator also flashes red.To remove the jammed original, open the document processor cover or the DP original reversing cover.To reset the original misfeed detection, open and close the document processor cover or DP original reversing cover toturn DP safety switch 1 or 2 off and on.
(2) Original misfeed detection conditions
Figure 1-4-1
OFSW
OSBSW
DPTSW
1-4-1
3J9
Section Jam code Conditions Specified time
DP 70No original feed
In the single-sided or double-sided original mode, primary original feed does not start.
71An original jam in the orig-inal feed/conveying sec-tion
During the secondary original feed in the single-sided original mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW) does not turn on within specified time.
1740ms
72An original jam in the orig-inal feed/conveying sec-tion 2
During the secondary original feed in the single-sided original mode, the original feed switch (OFSW) or original switchback switch (OSBSW) does not turn off within specified time.
5956ms
During original switchback operation in the double-sided origi-nal mode, the original feed switch (OFSW) or original switch-back switch (OSBSW) does not turn off within specified time.
4318ms
73An original jam in the orig-inal conveying section
During the secondary original feed in the single-sided or dou-ble-sided original mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW) does not turn off within specified time.
3784ms
74An original jam in the orig-inal registration section
The original switchback switch (OSBSW) does not turn on within specified time.
2045ms
75An original jam in the orig-inal registration section
In the single-sided original mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW) does not turn on within specified time.
1740ms
In the double-sided original mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW) does not turn on within specified time.
907ms
In the single-sided original mode, the original feed switch (OFSW) does not turn off within specified time.
5956ms
In the double-sided original mode, the original switchback switch (OSBSW) does not turn off within specified time.
4318ms
76An original jam in the orig-inal feed/conveying sec-tion
During the secondary original feed in the single-sided original mode, the original switchback switch (OSBSW) does not turn on within specified time.
2774ms
78DP cover open
DP cover is open. -
Optional fin-isher
92Exit sensor non-arrival jam (document finisher only)
In the straight mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the paper entry sen-sor (PES) was turned on.
1770ms
93Reverse sensor jam (doc-ument finisher only)
The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn on within specified time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning on.
1071ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned on within specified time.
435ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn off within specified time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning off.
622ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned off within specified time its turning on.
Depends on paper size
94Paper entry sensor stay/remaining jam (document finisher only)
The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned off within specified time its turning on.
Depends on paper size
1-4-2
3J9
(3) Paper misfeeds
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)An original jams in DP is indicated dur-ing copying (no origi-nal feed).Jam code 70
Defective original feed switch.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Defective original feed motor.
Run maintenance item U243 and select original feed motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.
(2)An original jams in DP is indicated dur-ing copying (a jam in the original feed/con-veying section 1).Jam code 71
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.DP timing switch, original feed switch, original switchback switch
Defective pulleys or rollers. Check visually and replace.DP feed pulley, DP separation pulleyDP registration roller, DP registration pulleyLower conveying roller, reading pulley
Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.Original feed motor, original conveying motor
(3)An original jams in DP is indicated dur-ing copying (a jam in the original feed/con-veying section 2).Jam code 72
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.DP timing switch, original feed switch, original switchback switch
Defective pulleys or rollers. Check visually and replace.DP feed pulley, DP separation pulleyDP registration roller, DP registration pulleyLower conveying roller, reading pulley
Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.Original feed motor, original conveying motor
(4)An original jams in DP is indicated dur-ing copying (a jam in the original convey-ing section).Jam code 73
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.DP timing switch, original feed switch, original switchback switch
Defective pulleys or rollers. Check visually and replace.DP feed pulley, DP separation pulleyDP registration roller, DP registration pulleyLower conveying roller, reading pulley
Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.Original feed motor, original conveying motor
(5)An original jams in DP is indicated dur-ing copying (jam in the original registra-tion section).Jam code 74
Defective original switch-back switch.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchback switch on and off manually. Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
1-4-3
3J9
(6)An original jams in DP is indicated dur-ing copying (jam in the original registra-tion section).Jam code 75
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.DP timing switch, original feed switch, original switchback switch
Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.Original feed motor, original conveying motor
(7)An original jams in DP is indicated dur-ing copying (jam in the original feed/reg-istration section).Jam code 76
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.Original feed switch, original switchback switch
Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.Original feed motor, original conveying motor
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
1-4-4
3J9
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem dis-played as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayedrequesting the user to call for service.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning front cover/feed cover switch off and backon.
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0410 DP communication problemThere is no reply after 5 retries at com-munication or a communication error occurs.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector YC17 on the scanner PWB and the connector YC1 on the DP drive PWB. Repair or replace if nec-essary.
Defective PWB. Replace the DP drive PWB or scanner PWB and check for correct operation.
C9060 EEPROM problemRead and write data does not match.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector YC7 on the scanner PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective DP drive PWB.
Replace DP drive PWB and check for cor-rect operation.
1-4-5
3J9
1-4-3 Electric problems
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(1)The original feed motor or original con-veying motor does not operate.
Defective motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the original feed motor or original conveying motor.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and check if the motor operates when the following terminals on the DP driver PWB go low. If not, replace the corresponding motor.Original feed motor: YC2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6Original conveying motor: YC2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 2-12
Defective DP driver PWB. Run maintenance item U243 and check if following terminals on the DP driver PWB go low. If not, replace the DP driver PWB.Original feed motor: YC2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6Original conveying motor: YC2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 2-12
(2)The original feed solenoid, switchback feedshift solenoid, eject feedshift sole-noid or switchback pressure solenoid does not operate.
Defective solenoid coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the corre-sponding solenoid.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective DP driver PWB. Run maintenance item U243 and check if following terminals on the DP driver PWB goes low. If not, replace the DP driver PWB.Original feed solenoid: YC2-14 and 2-15Switchback feedshift solenoid: YC3-2Eject feedshift solenoid: YC3-4Switchback pressure solenoid: YC2-17 and 2-18
(3)The original feed clutch does not oper-ate.
Defective clutch coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the corre-sponding solenoid.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective DP driver PWB. Run maintenance item U243 and check if YC4-2 on the DP driver PWB goes low. If not, replace the DP driver PWB.
(4)A message indicating cover open is dis-played when the DP is closed correctly.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective DP safety switch 1.
Check for continuity across the contacts of the switch. If none when the switch is on, replace DP safety switch 1.
(5)An original jams when the main power switch is turned on.
A piece of paper torn from an original is caught around the switch.
Remove any found.
Defective original feed switch, original switchback switch or DP timing switch.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the switch on and off manu-ally. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
The surface facing the DP timing switch is soiled.
Check if the projection at the center of the conveying cover that is facing the DP timing switch is soiled with paper powder. If so, clean it.
1-4-6
3J9
1-4-4 Mechanical problems
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)No primary original feed.
The surfaces of the DP forwarding pulleys, DP original feed pulley or DP separation pul-ley are dirty with paper powder.
Check and clean them with isopropyl alcohol if they are dirty.
Check if the DP original feed pulley or the DP forwarding pulley is deformed.
If so, replace (see page 1-5-3).
Electrical problem with the following clutch or solenoid:Original feed solenoidOriginal feed clutch
See page 1-5-7.
(2)No secondary original feed.
The DP registration pulley and the DP regis-tration roller do not contact each other cor-rectly.
Check and clean them with isopropyl alcohol if they are dirty.
(3)Originals jam.
Originals outside the specifications are used. Use only originals conforming to the specifi-cations.
The surfaces of the DP forwarding pulleys, DP original feed pulley or DP separation pul-ley are dirty with paper powder.
Check and clean them with isopropyl alcohol if they are dirty.
The DP original feed pulley and the DP sepa-ration pulley do not contact each other cor-rectly.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
1-4-7
3J9
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-4-8
3J9
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly
(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk.When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge.Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.When replacing battery on a PWB, dispose properly according to laws and regulations.
1-5-1
3J9
1-5-2 Original feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting the DP forwarding pulley and DP feed pulley
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the DP forwarding pulley or DP feed pulley.
Procedure1. Open the document processor cover.2. Remove two screws holding the upper origi-
nal feed cover and then the cover.
Detaching the DP forwarding pulley3. Remove the stop ring at the machine front
and then remove the bushing.4. Pull out the forwarding shaft toward the rear
side of the machine and slide the bushing.5. Remove the DP forwarding pulley from the
forwarding shaft.
Detaching the DP feed pulley6. Remove the stop ring at the machine front
and then remove the bushing.7. Remove the stop ring at the machine rear.8. Pull out the front original feed shaft toward
the rear side of the machine and slide the bushing.
9. Remove the DP feed pulley from the front original feed shaft.
10. Clean or replace the DP forwarding pulley and the DP feed pulley.
11. Refit all the removed parts.When refitting the DP forwarding pulley and DP feed pulley, ensure that the notches in the pulleys are aligned with the projections on the one-way clutches.
Figure 1-5-1
Front original
feed shaft
Bushing
Bushing
DP feed pulley
Forwarding
shaft
DP forwarding belt
DP forwarding pulley
Bushing
Bushing
Stop ring
Stop ring
One-way clutch
One-way clutch
Stop ring
Front
Rear
1-5-2
3J9
(2) Detaching and refitting the DP separation pulley
Follow the procedure below to clean or replace the DP separation pulley.
Procedure1. Open the document processor cover2. Remove two screws holding the upper origi-
nal feed cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-5-2
3. Remove two screws holding the upper feed guide.
4. Remove the two screws holding the original feed lift and then the lift.
Figure 1-5-3
Screws
Upper original
feed cover
ScrewsUpper original feed
guide plate
Original feed lift
1-5-3
3J9
5. Remove the screw holding the separation pulley unit and then the unit.
Figure 1-5-4
6. Remove the screw holding the separation guide and then the guide.
7. Remove the separation shaft from the sepa-ration pulley arms.
8. Remove the stopper from the separation shaft and then remove the DP separation pulley.
9. Clean or replace the DP separation pulley.10. Refit all the removed parts.
Figure 1-5-5
ScrewSeparation pulley unit
Separation shaft
Separation pulley arm
Separation pulley arm
Separation guide
Screw
DP separation pulley
Stopper
1-5-4
3J9
2-1 Mechanical construction
2-1-1 Original feed sectionThe original feed section consists of the parts shown in figure 2-1-1. An original placed on the original table is conveyed to the original switchback section or the original conveying section.
Figure 2-1-1 Original feed section
Figure 2-1-2 Original feed section block diagram
(1) Original table(2) DP forwarding pulleys(3) DP original feed pulley(4) DP separation pulley(5) DP original feed upper guide(6) DP original feed lower guide(7) Original feed lift
(8) DP registration pulley(9) DP registration roller(10) DP registration guide(11) Original set switch (OSSW)(12) Original feed switch (OFSW)(13) Original feed clutch (OFCL)(14) Original feed solenoid (OFSOL)
OFSW
OFSOL
OFCL
OFM
DPDPWB
YC
3-6
YC
2-1
4 -
YC
2-1
5
YC
4-2
YC
3-9
YC
2-3
-
YC
2-6
OSSW
2-1-1
3J9
2-1-2 Original switchback sectionThe original switchback section consists of the parts shown in figure 2-1-3. The original from the original feed section or original conveying section is reversed and conveyed to the original conveying section.
Figure 2-1-3 Original switchback section
Figure 2-1-4 Original switchback section block diagram
(1) Switchback pulley(2) Switchback roller(3) Switchback feedshift guide(4) Left switchback guide(5) Switchback guide
(6) Original switchback switch (OSBSW)
(7) Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL)
(8) Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL)
DPDPWB
YC
4-4
YC
3-2
YC
2-1
7 -
YC
2-1
8
OSBSW
SBPSOL SBFSSOL
2-1-2
3J9
(1) Operation of original switchback
In the double-sided original mode, the switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) turns on, changing the position of the switchback feedshift guide. This switches the path of the original to the original switchback section to where the original is fed.The switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) then turns off, allowing the switchback feedshift guide to return to the origi-nal position by which the path of the original is switched back to the original conveying section. The now reversed original is carried to the original conveying section and the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns off, releasing the switch-back pulley to prevent an original jam in the original switchback section.
Figure 2-1-5
Switchback
pulley
Switchback feedshift solenoid
2-1-3
3J9
2-1-3 Original conveying sectionThe original conveying section consists of the parts shown in Figure. Synchronized with the copier scanning operation, the original is conveyed across the slit glass and ejected when scanning is complete.In the double-sided original mode, the eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) turns on, moving the eject feedshift guide to switch the path of the original. When the scanning of the first face (reverse face) of the original is complete, the original is conveyed to the original switchback section again.
Figure 2-1-6 Original conveying section
Figure 2-1-7 Original conveying section block diagram
(1) Upper original conveying pulley(2) Upper original conveying roller(3) Lower original conveying roller(4) Front scanning pulley(5) Middle original conveying roller(6) Middle original conveying pulley(7) Eject pulley(8) Eject roller
(9) Original conveying guide(10) Eject feedshift guide(11) Upper eject guide(12) Lower eject guide(13) Slit glass (copier)(14) DP timing switch (DPTSW)(15) Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL)
DPTSW
DPDPWB
YC
4-7
YC
3-4
YC
2-9
-
YC
2-1
2
EFSSOL
OCM
2-1-4
3J9
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout
(1) PWBs
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs
1. DP driver PWB (DPDPWB).......................... Controls electrical components of the DP.2. Original set LED PWB (OSLEDPWB).......... Indicates presence of originals on the DP or an original jam.
1
2
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
2-2-1
3J9
(2) Switches and sensors
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors
1. DP safety switch 1 (DPSSW1)..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DP is opened; resets original misfeed detection.
2. DP safety switch 2 (DPSSW2)..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DP original switchback cover is opened; resets original misfeed detection.
3. Original set switch (OSSW) ......................... Detects the presence of an original.4. Original feed switch (OFSW) ....................... Detects primary original feed end timing.5. Original switchback switch (OSBSW) .......... Detects an original misfeed in the original switchback section.6. DP timing switch (DPTSW) .......................... Detects the original scanning timing.7. Original size length switch (OSLSW) ........... Detects the length of the original.8. Original size width switch (OSWSW) ........... Detects the width of the original.
8
732
4
1
5
6
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
2-2-2
3J9
(3) Motors
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
1. Original feed motor (OFM) ........................... Drives the original feed and switchback sections.2. Original conveying motor (OCM) ................. Drives the original conveying section.
2
1
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
2-2-3
3J9
(4) Clutches and solenoids
Figure 2-2-4 Clutches and solenoids
1. Original feed solenoid (OFSOL)................... Operates the paper feed lift.2. Switchback feedshift solenoid SBFSSOL) ... Operates the switchback feedshift guide.3. Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) .............. Operates the eject feedshift guide.4. Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL).... Operates the switchback pulley.5. Original feed clutch (OFCL) ......................... Controls the drive of the DP original feed pulley.
14
2 5
3
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
2-2-4
3J9
2-3 Operation of the PWBs
2-3-1 DP driver PWB
Figure 2-3-1DP driver PWB block diagram
DPDPWB
5V Machine
SPWB
CPU
DriverSBFSSOL
DriverOFSOL
Driver SBPSOL
Driver OFCL
Driver EFSSOL
OR
GV
SY
5V
5V
R2
4V
SI
SC
LK
SO
DP
RD
DP
SE
SE
T S
W
FE
ED
OSSW
OSLEDPWB
OSLSW
OSWSW
DPTSW
OSBSW
OFSW
CPU (U1)
Motor
driver
(U5)
Motor
driver
(U6)
OFM
OCM
2-3-1
3J9
Figure 2-3-2 DP driver PWB silk-screen diagram
YC
6Y
C5
U1
YC1
YC
4Y
C3
13
1314
15
2
1
YC
2
1 2
17
18
2 1
2 1
16
17
2-3-2
3J9
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionYC1 1 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC supply
Connected to the machine.
2 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC supply3 PG - - Power ground4 PG - - Power ground
5 R5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC supply
6 SG - - Signal ground
7 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC supply
8 SETOUT - - Not used
9 SDI I 5 V DC Serial communication SI signal
10 SDO O 5 V DC Serial communication SD signal
11 SCLK I 5 V DC Serial communication SCLK signal
12 SEL I 5 V DC Serial communication select signal
13 RDY O 5 V DC Serial communication ready signal
14 DPVSYNC O 5 V DC DPTSW: On/Off
15 N.C. - - Not used
16 DPFEED O 5 V DC Timing signal for the machine
YC2 1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply
Connected to the origi-nal feed motor, origi-nal convey-ing motor, original feed solenoid and switch-back pres-sure solenoid.
2 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply
3 FMOT A O 24 V DC OFM motor coil energization pulse
4 FMOT B O 24 V DC OFM motor coil energization pulse5 FMOT-A O 24 V DC OFM motor coil energization pulse6 FMOT-B O 24 V DC OFM motor coil energization pulse7 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply8 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply9 CMOT A O 24 V DC OCM motor coil energization pulse
10 CMOT B O 24 V DC OCM motor coil energization pulse11 CMOT-A O 24 V DC OCM motor coil energization pulse12 CMOT-B O 24 V DC OCM motor coil energization pulse13 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply14 FD SOL(ACT) O 24 V DC OFSOL: actuate15 FD SOL(RET) O 24 V DC OFSOL: return16 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply
17 REV SOL(ACT) O 24 V DC SBPSOL: actuate18 REV SOL(RET) O 24 V DC SBPSOL: return
YC3 1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supplyConnected to the switchback feedshift solenoid, eject feed-shift sole-noid, original feed switch, origi-nal set switch and original set LED PWB.
2 REV JCT SOL O 24 V DC SBFSSOL: On/Off3 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply4 EJ JCT SOL O 24 V DC EFSSOL: On/Off5 R5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply6 FD SW I 5 V DC OFSW: On/Off7 G(5V) - - Signal ground
8 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply9 SET SW I 5 V DC OSSW: On/Off10 G(5V) - - Signal ground11 LED- O 5 V DC OSLEDPWB (red): On/Off12 G(5V) - - Signal ground13 LED PWB(GN) O 5 V DC OSLEDPWB (green): On/Off
2-3-3
3J9
YC4 1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supplyConnected to the origi-nal feed clutch, origi-nal switch-back switch, DP timing switch, origi-nal size length switch and original size width switch.
2 FD CL O 24 V DC OFCL: On/Off3 G(5V) - - Signal ground4 REV SW I 5 V DC OSBSW: On/Off
5 R5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply6 G(5V) - - Signal ground7 TMG SW I 5 V DC DPTSW: On/Off
8 R5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply9 G(5V) - - Signal ground10 SZ DET I 5 V DC OSLSW: On/Off11 R5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply12 G(5V) - - Signal ground13 SZ SW A I 5 V DC OSWSW: On/Off14 R5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply
YC5 1 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supplyConnected to DP safety switch 1 and 2.
2 N.C. - - Not used3 R24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC supply4 N.C. - - Not used5 COV SF OPEN I 5 V DC DPSSW1: On/Off6 DF SF OPEN I 5 V DC DPSSW2: On/Off
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
2-3-4
3J9
2-4 A
ppen
dixe
s
Tim
ing
char
t No.
1 O
rigin
al fe
ed o
pera
tion
1: F
eedi
ng a
n A
4/11
" x
81/
2" o
rigin
al in
sin
gle-
side
d or
igin
al m
ode
15
10
10
33
33
10
33
33
10
33
33
30
10
33
33
30
15
01
50
15
0
Clo
ckw
ise
Accu
rete
: O
N
59
6 p
uls
Clo
ckw
ise
Co
un
terw
ise
Orig
ina
l siz
e (
in a
uto
se
lectio
n m
od
e)
Clo
ckw
ise
20
15
pu
ls
Re
turn
: O
N
Ne
xt
orig
ina
l
Le
ad
ing
ed
ge
of
orig
ina
lT
raili
ng
ed
ge
of
orig
ina
l
DP
ST
AR
T
Re
ad
ing
OF
SO
L
OF
CL
OF
M
OC
M
OF
SW
OS
BS
W
DP
TS
W
OV
SY
NC
2-4-1
3J9
Timin
g ch
art N
o.2
Orig
inal
feed
ope
ratio
n 2:
Fee
ding
an
A4/
11"
x 8
1/2"
orig
inal
in s
ingl
e-si
ded
orig
inal
mod
e
DP
ST
AR
T
Re
ad
ing
OF
SO
L
15
OF
CL
10
OF
M
10
33
33
10
33
33
10
33
33
OC
M
10
33
33
10
33
33
30
10
33
33
30
OF
SW
OS
BS
W
DP
TS
W
OV
SY
NC
15
01
50
15
0
Clo
ckw
ise
Accu
rate
: O
N
59
6 p
uls
Co
un
terw
ise
Orig
ina
l siz
e (
in a
uto
se
lectio
n m
od
e)
Clo
ckw
ise
20
15
pu
lsRe
turn
: O
N
Clo
ckw
ise
??
?
Co
un
terw
ise
Clo
ckw
ise
??
?
Ne
xt
orig
ina
lL
ea
din
g e
dg
e o
f o
rig
ina
lT
raili
ng
ed
ge
of
orig
ina
l
Ne
xt
orig
ina
l
2-4-2
3J9
Timin
g ch
art N
o.3
Orig
inal
feed
ope
ratio
n 3:
Fee
ding
two
A4/
11"
x 8
1/2"
orig
inal
s su
cces
sive
ly in
sin
gle-
side
d or
igin
al m
ode
15
10
10
10
33
33
10
33
33
10
33
33
10
33
33
10
33
33
10
33
33
10
33
33
30
10
33
33
30
15
01
50
15
0
Clo
ckw
ise
Accu
rate
: O
N
59
6 p
uls
Clo
ckw
ise
Co
un
terw
ise
Orig
ina
l siz
e (
in a
uto
se
lectio
n m
od
e)
Le
ad
ing
ed
ge
of
firs
t o
rig
ina
lL
ea
din
g e
dg
e o
f se
co
nd
orig
ina
lT
raili
ng
ed
ge
of
se
co
nd
orig
ina
lT
raili
ng
ed
ge
of
firs
t o
rig
ina
l
Ne
xt
orig
ina
l
Clo
ckw
ise
Co
un
terw
ise
??
?
Co
un
terw
ise
??
?
596 p
uls
Orig
ina
l siz
e (
in a
uto
se
lectio
n m
od
e)
Ne
xt
orig
ina
l
Clo
ckw
ise
20
15
pu
ls
Clo
ckw
ise
Re
turn
: O
N
Co
nve
yin
g f
irst
pa
ge
sta
rtC
on
ve
yin
g s
eco
nd
pa
ge
sta
rt
50
4 p
uls
of
OC
M
DP
ST
AR
T
Re
ad
ing
OF
SO
L
OF
CL
OF
M
OC
M
OF
SW
OS
BS
W
DP
TS
W
OV
SY
NC
2-4-3
3J9
Timin
g ch
art N
o.4
Orig
inal
feed
ope
ratio
n 4:
Fee
ding
two
A4R
/81/
2" x
11"
orig
inal
s su
cces
sive
ly in
dou
ble-
side
d or
igin
al m
ode
DP
ST
AR
T
Re
ad
ing
OF
SO
L
15
0
SB
PS
OL
15
01
50
15
01
50
15
01
50
SB
FS
SO
L
EF
SS
OL
OF
CL
10
OF
M
10
33
331
033
331
033
33201033
10
33
33
332
01
03
33
3
OC
M
1033
33
1033
333
010
33
33
30
OE
SW
OS
BS
W
DP
TS
W
OV
SY
NC
15
01
50
15
0
22
01
80
Actu
ate
: O
N
Re
turn
: O
NR
etu
rn:
ON
Re
turn
: O
NR
etu
rn:
ON
Clo
ckw
ise
59
6 p
uls
Co
un
terw
ise
Co
un
terw
ise
Actu
ate
: O
NA
ctu
ate
: O
N
Orig
ina
l siz
e
(in
au
to s
ele
ctio
n m
od
e)
Orig
ina
l siz
e
(in
au
to s
ele
ctio
n m
od
e)
Le
ad
ing
ed
ge
of
fisrt
fa
ce
Le
ad
ing
ed
ge
of
se
co
nd
fa
ce
Tra
ilin
g e
dg
e o
f
fisrt
fa
ce
Tra
ilin
g e
dg
e o
f
se
co
nd
fa
ce
25
0 p
uls
Clo
ckw
ise
Clo
ckw
ise
Co
un
terw
ise
25
0 p
uls
Clo
ckw
ise
Clo
ckw
ise
Ne
xt
orig
ina
l
Clo
ckw
ise
20
15
pu
ls
Re
turn
: O
N
2-4-4
3J9
List of maintenance parts
Maintenance part name Part No. Alternative part No.
Fig. No.
Ref. No.Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
DP forwarding pulley ROLLER FEED 303J906010 3J906010 4 27DP feed pulley ROLLER FEED 303J906010 3J906010 4 27DP separation pulley ROLLER FEED 303J906010 3J906010 4 27DP registration roller ROLLER REGISTRATION 303JC08040 3JC08040 6 56Original feed switch PARTS,SWITCH FEED SP 303JC94040 3JC94040 4 17Upper original conveying roller UPPER ROLLER CONVEYING 303JC08050 3JC08050 6 30Lower original conveying roller LOWER ROLLER CONVEYING 303JC08060 3JC08060 6 32Middle original conveying roller INNER ROLLER CONVEYING 303JC08070 3JC08070 6 19Original conveying guide GUIDE READING 3C008010 - 6 9DP timing switch PARTS,SENSOR TIMING SP 303JC94050 3JC94050 6 22Eject roller ROLLER EJECT 303JC08080 3JC08080 6 39Switchback roller ROLLER LOOP 303JC08090 3JC08090 5 6Original set switch SENSOR ORIGINAL 3H627240 - 3 12Original holder mat PLATE ORIGINAL 303JC04200 3JC04200 1 38
2-4-5
3J9
Periodic maintenance proceduresSection Maintenance
part/locationMethod Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Test copy and test print
Perform at the maxi-mum copy size
Clean Every service.
Section Maintenancepart/location
Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Original feed section
DP forwarding pulley Clean or replace
Every service. Clean with alcohol.Replace every 200,000
P.1-5-3
DP feed pulley Clean or replace
Every service. Clean with alcohol.Replace every 200,000
P.1-5-3
DP separation pulley Clean or replace
Every service. Clean with alcohol.Replace every 200,000
P.1-5-4
DP registration roller Clean Every service. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Original feed switch Clean Every service. Air blow.
Pulleys Check or clean
Every service. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Guide Clean Every service. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Section Maintenancepart/location
Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Original con-veying sec-
Lower original convey-ing roller
Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Upper original convey-ing roller
Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Middle original convey-ing roller
Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Original conveying guide
Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
DP timing switch Clean Every service Air blow.
Pulleys Check or clean
Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Guide Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
2-4-6
3J9
*Equipped with the machine.
Section Maintenancepart/location
Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Original eject section
Eject roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Switchback roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Pulleys Check or clean
Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Section Maintenancepart/location
Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Original table Original set switch Clean Every service Air blow.
Section Maintenancepart/location
Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Covers Covers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Original holder mat Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Slit glass* Check or clean
Every service Clean with a dry cloth. (Do not clean with alcohol nor wet cloth)
Section Maintenancepart/location
Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Other Sensors Clean Every service Air blow.
2-4-7
3J9
Wiring diagramS
BF
SS
OL
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
FD CL
R24V 4-1
4-2
REV JCT SOL
3-1
3-2
R24V
12
OF
CL
12
DP
SS
W2
13
2
DPRDY
DPSCLK
5V
5V
SGND
3.3V
PG
24V
DPSDI
DPSDO
3.3V
12V
PG
DPTMG
DPSEL
8
2
4
9
1
14
3
13
5
10
7
11
6
12
15
SGND
16
RDY
SCLK
SDI
5V
24V
R5V
PG
24V
SEL
SDO
SETOUT
SG
PG
DPVSYNC
DPFEED
N.C.
8
2
4
9
1
14
3
13
5
10
7
11
6
12
15
16
EF
SS
OL
EJ JCT SOL
3-3
3-4
R24V
12
OF
SW
13
2
R5V
G(5V)
3-5
3-6
3-7
FD SW
OS
SW
13
2
5V
G(5V)
3-8
3-9
3-10
SET SW
OS
LE
DP
WB
31
2
LEDPWB(AMBER)
G(5V)
3-11
3-12
3-13LED PWB(GN)
OS
BS
W13
2
R5V
G(5V) 4-3
4-4
4-5
REV SW
DP
TS
W
13
2
R5V
G(5V) 4-6
4-7
4-8
TMG SW
13
52
461
35
24
6
R5V
G(5V) 4-9
4-10
4-11
SZ DET
R5V
G(5V) 4-12
4-13
4-14
SZ SW A
OS
LS
W13
2
OS
WS
W31
2
R24V
R24V
FMOT A
FMOT B
FMOT-A
FMOT-B
13
52
46
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
13
52
46
OF
SO
L13
2
FD SOL(RET)
R24V 2-13
2-14
2-15
FD SOL(ACT)
13
2
OF
MO
CM
SB
PS
OL
13
2
REV SOL(RET)
R24V 2-16
2-17
2-18
REV SOL(ACT)
13
2
R24V
R24V
CMOT A
CMOT B
CMOT-A
CMOT-B
DP
SS
W1
13
2N.C.
24V
N.C.
R24V
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
DF SF OPEN
COV SF OPEN 5-5
5-6
12
12
12
13
52
461
35
24
6
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
PGND
SGND
PGND
DPEND
24V
24V
24V
PGND
PGND
RDY
SCLK
SDI
5V
24V
R5V
PG
24V
SEL
SDO
SG
PG
DPVSYNC
DPFEED
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
D-21
D-9
D-2
D-15
D-19
D-11
D-7
D-18
D-6
D-5
D-17
D-4
D-3
D-16
Ma
ch
ine
2-4-8
JS-710
3KN
CONTENTS1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-11-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-21-1-3 Machine cross section ............................................................................................................................1-1-3
1-2 Installation1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-11-2-2 Unpacking ...............................................................................................................................................1-2-2
1-3 Maintenance Mode1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1(2) Contents of maintenance mode items...............................................................................................1-3-2
1-4 Troubleshooting1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................................................................................1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ...................................................................................................................1-4-1(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ..................................................................................................1-4-1(3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-2
1-4-2 Electric problems ....................................................................................................................................1-4-31-4-3 Mechanical problems ..............................................................................................................................1-4-4
2-1 Mechanical construction2-1-1 Construction of each section...................................................................................................................2-1-1
(1) Paper ejection to the job separator tray ............................................................................................2-1-2(2) Paper conveying to the optional finisher ...........................................................................................2-1-2
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1
2-3 Operation of the PWBs2-3-1 Job main PWB ........................................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 AppendixesWiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-1
3KN
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 SpecificationsType ................................................EnclosedNumber of trays ..............................One trayTray capacity...................................100 sheets (80 g/m2)Paper sizes .....................................11 x 17", 8 1/2 x 14", 11 x 8 1/2", 8 1/2 x 11", 7 1/4 x 10 1/2", 5 1/2 x 8 1/2", 8 1/2 x 13",
8 1/2 x 13 1/2", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, FolioPaper type .....................Weight: 60 - 105 g/m2
Types: standard, recycled, color, thin, letterheadPower source..................................Electrically connected to the machineDimensions .....................................570 (W) x 570 (D) x 240 (H) mm
22 7/16" (W) x 22 7/16" (D) x 9 1/2" (H)Weight.............................................2.3 kg or less/5.06 lbs. or less
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-1-1
3KN
1-1-2 Parts names
Figure 1-1-1
1. Job separator tray2. LED
1-1-2
3KN
1-1-3 Machine cross section
Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section
Paper path
1-1-3
3KN
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-1-4
3KN
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment1. Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.)
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photo-conductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams.Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto the machine.Avoid dust and vibration.Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°).Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photo-conductor, such as mer-cury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.Select a room with good ventilation.
1-2-1
3KN
1-2-2 Unpacking
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking
Caution: Place the machine on a level surface.
1. Outer case2. Pad A3. Job separator4. Job separator pad5. Plastic bag6. Upper left cover JS7. Plastic bag8. Cover left OP roll9. Plastic bag10. Guide plate
11. Plastic bag12. Front left cover JS13. Pad B14. Plastic bag15. Retainer16. Plastic bag17. Fixing plate F18. Fixing plate R19. M4 x 10 tap-tight S
screws
20. M4 x 8 tap-tight S screws21. Plastic bag22. Pad C23. Job separator tray24. Plastic bag25. Installation guide26. Plastic bag27. Bar-code labels
1-2-2
3KN
1-3 Maintenance Mode
1-3-1 Maintenance modeThe machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Enter 10871087 using
the numeric keys.
Enter 001 using the cursor
up/down keys or numeric keys
and press the start key.
Enter the maintenance item
number using the cursor up/down keys
or numeric keys.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Press the start key.
Start
End
Maintenance mode is entered.
The maintenance item is
selected.
Maintenance mode is exited.
Repeat the same
maintenance item?
Run another maintenance
item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
1-3-1
3KN
(2) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenanceitem No. Description
U030 Checking the operation of the motorsDescriptionDrives each motor.DescriptionTo check the operation of each motor.Method
1. Press the start key.2. Select the motor to be operated. The operation starts.
Two or more motors can be selected.
3. To stop operation, an item is selected again or press the stop/clear key.CompletionPress the stop/clear key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U031 Checking switches for paper conveyingDescriptionDisplays the ON/OFF status of each paper detection switch on the paper conveying path.PurposeTo check the operation of the switches for paper conveying.Method
1. Press the start key. A list of switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed.2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Display MotorConveying Motor Paper feed/developing MOTOR BK (PF/DEVM-BK) and MP motor
(MPM) are turned on.Color Dev Motor Developing motor CMY (DEVM-CMY) is turned on.Fixing Motor Fuser motor (FUM) is turened on.Eject Motor (Normal) Eject motor (EM) is turned on clockwise.Eject Motor (Reverse) Eject motor (EM) is turned on counterwise.Option Eject Motor Job eject motor (JOBEM) is turned on.Duplex Motor Duplex motor (DUM) is turned on.
Display SensorMPF_UNIT MP tary switch (MPTSW)MPF_FEED1 MP paper feed switch (MPPFSW)MPF_FEED2 MP paper conveying switch (MPPCSW)FEED 1 Feed switch 1 (FSW1)FEED 2 Feed switch 2 (FSW2)FEED 3 Feed switch 3 (FSW3)REGIST Regist switch (RSW)BELT Transfer detection sensor (TRDS)EXIT Eject switch (ESW)DUPLEX 1 Duplex jam detection switch (DUJDSW)DUPLEX 2 Jam detection sensor (JDS)OVERFLOW Paper full sensor (PFS)JOB SEP Job eject switch (JBESW)
1-3-2
3KN
U033 Checking the operation of the solenoidsDescriptionApplies current to each solenoid in order to check its ON status.PurposeTo check the operation of each solenoid.Method
1. Press the start key. 2. Select the solenoid to be operated. The selected solenoid turns on and off.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display SolenoidBranch Inner Tray Feedshift solenoid 1 (FSSOL1)Eject Branch Solenoid Feedshift solenoid 2 (FSSOL2)MPT Pick up Solenoid MP solenoid (MPSOL)
1-3-3
3KN
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-3-4
3KN
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection
(1) Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel.To remove the jammed paper, open the left cover, conveying unit.Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on.
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
Figure 1-4-1
Section Jam code Conditions Specified time
Job separa-tor
51Misfeed in job separator eject section
The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.
1105ms
The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off.
1105ms
52Misfeed in feedshift sec-tion
During paper switchback operation, the feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on.
822ms
JBESW
FSSW
1-4-1
3KN
(3) Paper misfeeds
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)A paper jam in the eject section is indi-cated as soon as the power switch is turned on.
A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around feedshift switch, job eject switch.
Check visually and remove it, if any.
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.Feedshift switch/job eject switch
(2)A paper jam in the eject section is indi-cated during copying (jam in job separator eject section).Jam code 51
Broken switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch.
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn the following switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.Feedshift switch/job eject switch
(3)A paper jam in the feedshift section is indicated during copying (jam in feed-shift section).Jam code 52
Broken switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch.
Defective feedshift switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
1-4-2
3KN
1-4-2 Electric problems
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(1)The job eject motor does not operate.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Broken the gear. Check visually and replace the gear if necessary.
Defective job eject motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the job eject motor operates when YC5-1, YC5-2, YC5-3 and YC5-4 on the job main PWB go low. If not, replace the job eject motor.
Defective job main PWB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC5-1, YC5-2, YC5-3 and YC5-4 on the job main PWB go low. If not, replace the job main PWB.
Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC32-18 on the engine PWB goes low. If not, replace the engine PWB.
(2)The feedshift sole-noid 1/2 does not operate.
Broken solenoid coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the solenoid.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective job main PWB. Run maintenance item U033 and check if following terminals on the job main PWB go low. If not, replace the job main PWB.Feedshift solenoid 1: YC4-1, 3 on the job main PWBFeedshift solenoid 2: YC2-1, 3 on the job main PWB
Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U033 and check if following terminals on the engine PWB go low. If not, replace the engine PWB.Feedshift solenoid 1: YC32-12, 13 on the engine PWBFeedshift solenoid 2: YC32-15, 16 on the engine PWB
1-4-3
3KN
1-4-3 Mechanical problems
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)Paper jams.
Check if the paper is excessively curled. Change the paper.
Check if the contact between the job eject pul-ley and job eject roller is correct.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
(2)Abnormal noise is heard.
Check if the job eject pulley, job eject roller and gears operate smoothly.
Grease the bearings and gears.
1-4-4
3KN
2-1 Mechanical construction
2-1-1 Construction of each sectionThe job separator consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-1. It switches the paper path to eject printed paper to the job separator tray.
Figure 2-1-1 Job separator
Figure 2-1-2 Job separator block diagram
(1) Feedshift guide 2(2) Job eject roller(3) Job eject pulley(4) Lower finisher eject roller(5) Upper finisher eject roller(6) Job separator tray(7) Job eject switch (JBESW)(8) Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW)
JBEMFSSOL2
FSSOL1
JBMPWB
YC
2-2
,3
YC
4-1
,3
YC
3-2
YC
32
-2
YC
5-1
,2,3
,4
OP
2_
SO
L1
/2_
DR
OP
1_
SO
L1
/2_
DR
JO
B_
EX
IT_
JA
M
SE
T_
JO
B
YC
32
-5JO
B_
LE
D
OP
_M
OT
_A
/B/A
N/B
N
EPWB(machine)
JBESW
EPDSW
LEDPWB
2-1-1
3KN
(1) Paper ejection to the job separator tray
Printed pages are delivered to the job separator as the feedshift guide is maneuvered by feedshift solenoids 1 and 2 (FSSOL1/2). The paper delivered in the job separator is driven towards the job seprator tray as the job eject roller is rotated by the job eject motor (JBEM).
Figure 2-1-3
(2) Paper conveying to the optional finisher
Printed pages are delivered to the job separator as the feedshift guide is maneuvered by feedshift solenoids 1 and 2 (FSSOL 1/2). The paper delivered in the job separator is driven to the finisher as the upper finisher eject roller is rotated by the job eject motor (JBEM).
Figure 2-1-4
Feedshift guide
Feedshift guide
Job eject roller
Job separator tray
Feedshift guide
Feedshift guideUpper finisher eject roller
Optional document finisher
2-1-2
3KN
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout
Figure 2-2-1
1. Job main PWB (FMPWB) ............................ Controls electrical components.2. LED PWB (LEDPWB) .................................. Indicates the presence of paper on the job separator tray.3. Job eject motor (JBEM) ............................... Drives the eject roller.4. Feedshift solenoid 1 (FSSOL1).................... Switching the paper path.5. Feedshift solenoid 2 (FSSOL2).................... Switching the paper path.6. Job separator eject switch (JBESW)............ Detects a paper jam in the job separator.7. Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW).... Detects the presence of paper on the job separator tray.
1
3
2
5
4 6
7
Machine rearMachine front Machine inside
2-2-1
3KN
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-2-2
3KN
2-3 Operation of the PWBs
2-3-1 Job main PWB
Figure 2-3-1 Job main PWB block diagram
Figure 2-3-2 Job main PWB silk-screen diagram
Feedshift solenoid1
Feedshift solenoid2
Job ejectswitch
LED PWB
Ejected paper detection switch
Job eject
motor
OP_MOT_A/B/AN/BNOP_MOT_
MODE/CLK/DR
OP1_SOL1_DR/OP1_SOL2_DR
OP2_SOL1_DR/OP2_SOL2_DR
JOB_LED
JOB_EXIT_JAM
SET_JOB
Engine PWB
(machine)
Job main PWB
Motor
driver
(U1)
+5V2
+24V3
YC5YC2YC33
12
15
14
13
13 1
4 1
YC
1
YC4
U1
2-3-1
3KN
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionYC1 1 OP_MOT_MODE I 0/5 V DC JBEM MODE signal
Connected to the machine
2 OP_MOT_CLK I 0/5 V DC (pulse)
JBEM CLK signal
3 OP_MOT_DR I 0/5 V DC JBEM DR signal
4 +24V3 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
5 OP2_SOL1_DR I 0/5 V DC FSSOL2 (return): On/off
6 OP2_SOL2_DR I 0/5 V DC FSSOL2 (activate): On/off
7 +24V3 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
8 OP1_SOL1_DR I 0/5 V DC FSSOL1 (return): On/off
9 OP1_SOL2_DR I 0/5 V DC FSSOL1 (activate): On/off
10 JOB_EJECT O 5 V DC Connection signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 JOB_EXIT_JAM O 0/5 V DC JBESW: On/off
15 +5V2 I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input
YC2 1 +24V3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
Connected to feedshift solenoid 2
2 OP2_SOL2_DR O 0/24 V DC FSSOL2 (activate): On/off
3 OP2_SOL1_DR O 0/24 V DC FSSOL2 (return): On/off
YC3 1 +5V2 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power outputConnected to the job eject switch
2 JOB_EXIT_JAM I 0/5 V DC JBESW: On/off3 GND - - Ground
YC4 1 OP1_SOL2_DR O 0/24 V DC FSSOL1 (activate): On/off
Connected to feedshift solenoid 1
2 +24V3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
3 OP1_SOL1_DR O 0/24 V DC FSSOL1 (return): On/off
YC5 1 OP_MOT_A O 0/24 V DC (pulse)
Job eject motor drive control signal
Connected to the job eject motor
2 OP_MOT_B O 0/24 V DC (pulse)
Job eject motor drive control signal
3 OP_MOT_AN O 0/24 V DC (pulse)
Job eject motor drive control signal
4 OP_MOT_BN O 0/24 V DC (pulse)C
Job eject motor drive control signal
2-3-2
3KN
2-4-1
2-4 Appendixes
Wiring diagram
YC
32
EP
DS
W+
5V
23
31
51
1+
5V
2S
ET
_JO
B2
22
42
2S
ET
_JO
BG
ND
11
33
33
GN
D
LE
DP
WB
JO
B_
LE
D2
15
15
5JO
B_
LE
D+
5V
21
24
24
4+
5V
2
YC
3G
ND
33
13
GN
DJO
B_
EX
IT_
JA
M2
22
2JO
B_
EX
IT_
JA
M+
5V
21
13
1+
5V
2Y
C1
+5
V2
15
15
11
56
6+
5V
2JO
B_
EX
IT_
JA
M1
41
42
14
77
JO
B_
EX
IT_
JA
MY
C4
GN
D1
31
33
13
88
GN
DR
etu
rn3
33
3O
P1_
SO
L1
_D
RR
etu
rnG
ND
12
12
41
29
9G
ND
+2
4V
32
22
2+
24
V3
GN
D1
11
15
11
10
10
GN
DA
ctiva
te1
11
1O
P1_
SO
L2
_D
RA
ctiva
te
Re
turn
Activa
te
JO
B_
EJE
CT
10
10
61
01
11
1JO
B_
EJE
CT
OP
1_
SO
L2
_D
R9
97
91
21
2O
P1
_S
OL
2_
DR
YC
2O
P1_
SO
L1
_D
R8
88
81
31
3O
P1
_S
OL
1_
DR
Re
turn
33
OP
2_
SO
L1
_D
R+
24
V3
77
97
14
14
+2
4V
3A
ctiva
te2
2O
P2_
SO
L2
_D
RO
P2
_S
OL
2_
DR
66
10
61
51
5O
P2
_S
OL
2_
DR
+2
4V
31
1+
24
V3
OP
2_
SO
L1
_D
R5
51
15
16
16
OP
2_
SO
L1
_D
R+
24
V3
44
12
41
71
7+
24
V3
OP
_M
OT
_D
R3
31
33
18
18
OP
_M
OT
_D
RY
C5
OP
_M
OT
_C
LK
22
14
21
91
9O
P_
MO
T_
CL
KA
11
OP
_M
OT
_A
OP
_M
OT
_M
OD
E1
11
51
20
20
OP
_M
OT
_M
OD
EB
22
OP
_M
OT
_B
AN
33
OP
_M
OT
_A
NE
PW
B(m
ach
ine
)B
N4
4O
P_
MO
T_
BN
JB
MP
WB
FS
SO
L1
FS
SO
L2
JB
EM
YC
1
JB
ES
W
PF-710
3J4
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-11-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-21-1-3 Machine cross section ............................................................................................................................1-1-3
1-2 Installation1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-11-2-2 Unpacking ...............................................................................................................................................1-2-21-2-3 Installing the cassette heater (option) .....................................................................................................1-2-3
1-3 Maintenance Mode1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1(2) Contents of maintenance mode items...............................................................................................1-3-2
1-4 Troubleshooting1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................................................................................1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ...................................................................................................................1-4-1(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ..................................................................................................1-4-1(3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-2
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-4-4(1) Self-diagnostic function .....................................................................................................................1-4-4(2) Self diagnostic codes ........................................................................................................................1-4-4
1-4-3 Electric problems ....................................................................................................................................1-4-61-4-4 Mechanical problems ..............................................................................................................................1-4-8
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1
(1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-11-5-2 Paper feed section ..................................................................................................................................1-5-2
(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys ......................................1-5-2(2) Replacing paper feeder paper width switch 1, 2 ...............................................................................1-5-5(3) Replacing paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 and paper feeder paper conveying clutch ................1-5-7(4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster.........................................................................................1-5-9
2-1 Mechanical construction2-1-1 Mechanical construction .........................................................................................................................2-1-1
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1
2-3 Operation of the PWBs2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB .........................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-3 AppendixesList of maintenance parts........................................................................................................................2-4-1Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-4-1Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-2
3J4
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 SpecificationsPaper supply method......................Friction retard method (No. sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 caddettes)Paper size.......................................A3 to A5R, folio, 11" x 17" to 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"Supported paper .............................Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2
Types: standard, recycled, colorPower source..................................Electrically connected to the machine.Dimensions .....................................585 (W) x 590 (D) x 315 (H) mm
23 5/16" (W) x 23 1/4" (D) x 12 3/8" (H)Weight.............................................26 kg/57.2 lbs
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-1-1
3J4
1-1-2 Parts names
Figure 1-1-1
�
�
�
1. Cassette 32. Cassette 43. Left cover 3
1-1-2
3J4
1-1-3 Machine cross section
Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section
Paper path
1-1-3
3J4
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-1-4
3J4
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment1. Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.)
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photo-conductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams.Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto the machine.Avoid dust and vibration.Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°).Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photo-conductor, such as mer-cury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.Select a room with good ventilation.
1-2-1
3J4
1-2-2 Unpacking
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking
Caution: Place the machine on a level surface.
1. Paper feeder2. Retainer3. CVM4 x 06 cross-head
binding screws4. Pins5. Stays6. M4 x 10 TP screws7. Outer case8. Bottom pads
9. Upper pad10. Stays11. Machine cover12. Rear spacer13. Plastic bag14. Bar code label15. Plastic bag16. Installation guide
1-2-2
3J4
1-2-3 Installing the cassette heater (option)Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:Cassette heater (P/N 302FB25060): for 220 to 240 V specifications onlyCassette heater (P/N 302FB25050): for 120 V specifications onlyTwo (2) M4 x 8 S tight screws (P/N B1304060)
Procedure1. Remove cassette 3 and 4.2. Remove the three screws holding the paper
feeder rear cover and then the cover.3. Pass the cassette heater cable to the
machine rear through the cable hole in the machine right.
4. Attach the cassette heater using the two M4 x 8 S tight screws.
Figure 1-2-2
5. Insert the cassette heater connector into the connector of the main harness.
6. Tidy up the desk dehumidifier cable using the wire saddle and route the cable while clipping the wire saddles into the holes in the rear frame.
7. Refit the paper feeder rear cover.8. Refit cassette 3 and 4.
Figure 1-2-3
M4 x 8
S tight screws
Cable hole
Cassette heater
Wire saddle Cable of paper feeder
Cable of cassette heater
1-2-3
3J4
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-2-4
3J4
1-3 Maintenance Mode
1-3-1 Maintenance modeThe machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Enter 10871087 using
the numeric keys.
Enter 001 using the cursor
up/down keys or numeric keys
and press the start key.
Enter the maintenance item
number using the cursor up/down keys
or numeric keys.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Press the start key.
Start
End
Maintenance mode is entered.
The maintenance item is
selected.
Maintenance mode is exited.
Repeat the same
maintenance item?
Run another maintenance
item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
1-3-1
3J4
(2) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenanceitem No. Description
U247 Checking the operation of paper feederDescriptionTurns on motors and clutches of paper feeder.PurposeTo check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device.Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be operated.When selecting the motor, the operation starts. To stop the operation, select the item again.When selecting the clutch, each clutch is turned on for 1 s.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locationsDescriptionDisplays copy counts by paper feed locations.PurposeTo check the time to replace consumable parts.Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Display Motor and clutchesDESK FEED Paper feeder drive motor (PFDM)CLUTCH FEED Paper feeder feed clutch (PFFCL)CLUTCH U Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1)CLUTCH L Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2)
Display DescriptionBYPASS MP trayCASSETTE 1 Cassette 1CASSETTE 2 Cassette 2CASSETTE 3 Cassette 3CASSETTE 4 Cassette 4DUPLEX Duplex unit
1-3-2
3J4
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection
(1) Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel.Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the left cover 3 to turn left cover 3 switch off and on.
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
Figure 1-4-1
Section Jam code Conditions Specified time
Paper feed section
12No paper feed from cas-sette 3
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within the specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the speci-fied time.
1828 ms
13No paper feed from cas-sette 4
The paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) does not turn on within the specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time.
1828 ms
24Multiple sheets in cassette 3 paper feed section
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on.
3960 ms
25Multiple sheets in cassette 4 paper feed section
The paper feeder feed switch 1 (PFFSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on.
3960 ms
PFPFCL1
PFFSW
FSW3
PFPFCL2
1-4-1
3J4
(3) Paper misfeeds
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from cassette 3).Jam code 12
Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper.
Check if the paper feed pul-ley, forwarding pulley and separation pulley of cas-sette 3 are deformed.
Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
Broken feed switch 3 actua-tor.
Check visually and replace switch.
Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions.
Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-tus and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1.
Check (see page 1-4-6).
(2)A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from cassette 4).Jam code 13
Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper.
Check if the paper feed pul-ley, forwarding pulley and separation pulley of cas-sette 4 are deformed.
Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
Broken paper feeder feed switch actuator.
Check visually and replace switch.
Defective paper feeder feed switch.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feeder feed switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions.
Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-tus and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2.
Check (see page 1-4-6).
(3)A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in cassette 3).Jam code 24
Broken switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch.
Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Defective paper feeder paper feed clutch 1.
Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-tus and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1.
Check (see page 1-4-6).
Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers.
Check visually and replace.
1-4-2
3J4
(4)A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in cassette 4).Jam code 25
Broken switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch.
Defective paper feeder feed switch.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feeder feed switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Defective paper feeder paper feed clutch 2.
Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-tus and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2.
Check (see page 1-4-6).
Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers.
Check visually and replace.
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
1-4-3
3J4
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem dis-played as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning cover switch off and back on.
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0420 Paper feeder communication errorA communication error from paper feeder is detected 10 times in succes-sion.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector YC33 on the engine PWB and the connector YC1 on the paper feeder main PWB, and the conti-nuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the paper feeder main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct opera-tion.
C1030 Paper feeder lift motor 1 errorWhen optional cassette 3 is inserted, paper feeder lift switch 1 does not turn on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 1 turning on.The lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected above 500 ms during driving the motor.However, the first 1 s after paper feeder lift motor 1 is turned on is excluded from detection.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Broken gears or couplings of paper feeder lift motor 1.
Replace paper feeder lift motor 1.
Defective paper feeder lift motor 1.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 1.
Defective paper feeder lift switch 1.
Check if YC1-5 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 1 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 1.
C1040 Paper feeder lift motor 2 errorWhen optional cassette 4 is inserted, paper feeder lift switch 2 does not turn on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 2 turning on.The lift overcurrent protective monitor signal is detected above 500 ms during driving the motor.However, the first 1 s after paper feeder lift motor 2 is turned on is excluded from detection.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Broken gears or couplings of paper feeder lift motor 2.
Replace paper feeder lift motor 2.
Defective paper feeder lift motor 2.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 2.
Defective paper feeder lift switch 2.
Check if YC1-7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 2 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 2.
1-4-4
3J4
C1900 Paper feeder EEPROM errorWhen writing the data, the write data and the read data is not continuously in agreement three times.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective engine PWB.
Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-rect operation (see page 1-5-29).
Defective paper feeder.
Replace the paper feeder with another unit and check the operation. If the operation is normal, replace or repair paper feeder.
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1-4-5
3J4
1-4-3 Electric problems
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(1)The paper feeder does not operate when the main power switch is turned on.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective left cover 3 switch.
Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the left cover 3 switch.
(2)The paper feeder drive motor does not operate.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Broken the gear. Check visually and replace the gear if necessary.
Defective paper feeder drive motor.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if the paper feeder paper conveying motor operates when YC4-3 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder drive motor.
Defective paper feeder main PWB.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if YC4-3 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder main PWB.
(3)The paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 or paper feeder paper conveying clutch does not oper-ate.
Broken clutch coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the clutch.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective paper feeder main PWB.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if following terminals on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder main PWB.Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1: YC1-14Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2: YC1-13Paper feeder paper conveying clutch: YC2-1
(4)The paper feeder lift motor 1/2 does not operate.
Broken motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
(5)The size of paper on the cassette 3 is not displayed correctly.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective paper feeder paper length switch 1.
Check if YC3-7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when the paper feeder paper length switch 1 is turned on. If not, replace the paper feeder paper length switch 1.
Defective paper feeder paper width switch 1.
Check for continuity between YC3-9 and YC3-1, YC3-2, and YC3-3 on the paper feeder main PWB. If the continuity is unaffected by movement of the width guides in the cassette 3 (i.e. either remains present or remains absent), then replace the paper feeder paper width switch 1.
(6)The size of paper on the cassette 4 is not displayed correctly.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective paper feeder paper length switch 2.
Check if YC3-8 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when the paper feeder paper length switch 2 is turned on. If not, replace the paper feeder paper length switch 2.
Defective paper feeder paper width switch 2.
Check for continuity between YC3-10 and YC3-4, YC3-5, and YC3-6 on the paper feeder main PWB. If the continuity is unaf-fected by movement of the width guides in the cassette 4 (i.e. either remains present or remains absent), then replace the paper feeder paper width switch 2.
1-4-6
3J4
(7)The message requesting covers to be closed is dis-played when the left cover 3 is closed.
Poor contact of the left cover 3 switch connector terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective left cover 3 switch.
Check for continuity across the contacts. If there is no continuity when the left cover 3 switch is on, replace it.
(8)Others.
Wiring is broken, shorted or makes poor contact.
Check for continuity. If none, repair.
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1-4-7
3J4
1-4-4 Mechanical problems
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)No primary paper feed.
Check if the surfaces of the following rollers and pulleys are dirty with paper powder:forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley, separa-tion pulley, feed roller and feed pulley.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Check if the paper feed pulley or separation pulley is deformed.
Replace (see page 1-5-2).
Check if the forwarding pulley is deformed. Replace (see page 1-5-2).
Electrical problem with the following electro-magnetic clutches: paper feeder paper feed clutches 1/2 and paper feeder paper convey-ing clutch.
See page 1-4-6.
(2)Skewed paper feed.
Width guide in the cassette installed incor-rectly.
Check the width guide visually and remedy or replace if necessary.
Deformed width guide in the cassette. Check the width guide visually and remedy or replace if it is deformed.
(3)Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time.
Check if the separation pulley is deformed. Replace the separation pulley if it is worn (see page 1-5-2).
Check if the paper is curled. Change the paper.
(4)Paper jams.
Check if the paper is excessively curled. Change the paper.
Deformed guides along the paper conveying path.
Check visually and remedy or replace any deformed guides.
(5)Abnormal noise is heard.
Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears operate smoothly.
Grease the bushings and gears.
Check if the paper feeder paper feed clutches 1/2 and the aper feeder paper conveying clutch are installed correctly.
Remedy.
1-4-8
3J4
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly
(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk.When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge.Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.When replacing battery on a PWB, dispose properly according to laws and regulations.
1-5-1
3J4
1-5-2 Paper feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys
Replace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys as follows.
ProcedureRemoving the primary paper feed units
1. Remove cassette 3 and 4.2. Remove the two screws holding the lower
front cover and then the cover.3. Remove the one screw from each of the pri-
mary paper feed units and then the units.
Figure 1-5-1
Removing the forwarding pulley4. Remove the stopper and spring from the pri-
mary paper feed unit.5. Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the
direction the arrow, and remove from the pri-mary paper feed unit.
Figure 1-5-2
Primary paper feed unit
Screws
Forwarding pulley
retainer
Stopper
Spring
1-5-2
3J4
6. Remove the stop ring from the forwarding pulley retainer.Remove the forwarding pulley from the for-warding shaft.
Figure 1-5-3
Removing the paper feed pulley7. Remove two stop rings.8. Pull the paper feed shaft toward the rear of
the primary paper feed unit (in the direction of the arrow) and remove the paper feed pulley and gear.
Figure 1-5-4
Removing the separation pulley9. Remove the stop ring from the rear of the
primary paper feed unit.10. Pull the separation shaft toward the rear of
the machine (in the direction of the arrow) and remove the separation pulley.
Figure 1-5-5
Stop ring
Forwarding shaft
Forwarding pulley retainer
Forwarding pulley
Paper feed shaft Paper feed pulleyGear
Stop rings
Stop ring Separation shaft Separation pulley
1-5-3
3J4
11. Replace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys.
12. Refit all removed parts.
Cautions:When fitting the forwarding pulley, orient it correctly as shown in figure 1-5-6.When fitting the paper feed pulley and gear, keep the blue end of the paper feed pulley and the black end of the gear toward the machine rear.
Figure 1-5-6
Forwarding pulley
Machine front Machine rear
1-5-4
3J4
(2) Replacing paper feeder paper width switch 1, 2
Replace paper feeder paper width switch 1 and 2 as follows.
Caution:After replacing paper feeder paper width switch, be sure to perform (4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster.
Procedure1. Remove the cassette.2. Remove two screws and 8-pin socket from
the rear of the drawer.3. Detach the 8-pin connector from the 8-pin
socket.4. Remove the three screws holding the rack
adjuster.5. While raising the cassette lift in the direction
of the arrow, remove the rack adjuster.
Figure 1-5-7
6. Remove two screws from the back of the rack adjuster and then the paper feeder paper width switch.
Figure 1-5-8
Screws
Rack adjuster
Cassette lift
8-pin connector
Screws
8-pin socket
Screws
Paper feeder
paper width
switch
1-5-5
3J4
7. Apply the specified grease to the printed surface of the new paper feeder paper width switch (shaded area in the diagram) and fit the switch to the rack adjuster.
Figure 1-5-98. Refit all removed parts.
Apply the specified grease.
1-5-6
3J4
(3) Replacing paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 and paper feeder paper conveying clutch
Replace paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 and paper feeder paper conveying clutch as follows.
Procedure1. Remove the three screws holding the paper
feeder rear cover and then the cover.2. Remove the cable from the retainer clamp.3. Remove the three screws holding the
retainer and then the retainer.4. Remove the two screws holding the rear
cover left retainer and then the retainer.
Figure 1-5-10
5. Remove stop rings and bearings from paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 and 2.
6. Remove the stop ring from the paper feeder paper conveying clutch.
Figure 1-5-11
Clamp
Screws
ScrewsRetainer
Rear cover
left retainer
Stop ring and bearing
Stop ring and bearing
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1
Paper feeder
paper feed clutch 2
Stop ring
Paper feeder
paper conveying clutch
1-5-7
3J4
7. Remove the three screws holding the paper feeder drive motor retainer and then the retainer.
Figure 1-5-12
8. Remove the connectors and then the clutches.
Figure 1-5-13
9. Replace the clutches.10. Refit all removed parts.
Caution:When fitting the clutches, be sure to refit the whirl-stops.
Paper feeder
drive motor retainer
Screws
Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1
Paper feeder
paper conveying clutch
Connector
Connector
Connector
Paper feeder
paper feed clutch 2
1-5-8
3J4
Yes
No
Select [Center Adjust] and then select
[Center (Feed 3)].
Press the interrupt key to output the
test pattern.
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter 034 using cursor up/down keys
or numeric key and press the start key.
Exit maintenance mode.
Start
End
Is the image correct?
<Reference value>
Deviation to the left or right:
1.5 mm or less
Loosen the three screws securing the
rack adjuster and change the position
of the adjuster.
If the test pattern output example
looks like 1, turn the adjusting screw
clockwise, move the adjuster in the
direction of the black arrow ( ).
If the test pattern output example
looks like 2, turn the adjusting screw
counterclockwise, move the adjuster
in the direction of the white arrow
( ).
Retighten the three screws securing
the rack adjuster.
(4) Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster
Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and the original on the paper fed from the cassette.
Procedure
Figure 1-5-14
Figure 1-5-15 Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster
Correct image Output
example 1
Output
example 2
Rack adjuster
Screws
Adjusting screw
1-5-9
3J4
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-5-10
3J4
2-1 Mechanical construction
2-1-1 Mechanical constructionThe paper feeder feeds paper from either of its two cassettes to the machine. When paper is fed from cassette 3 of the paper feeder, the paper feeder paper conveying clutch (PFCCL) is operated to rotate the feed roller and pulley to carry the paper into the machine.
Figure 2-1-1
(1) Forwarding pulley(2) Paper feed pulley(3) Separation pulley(4) Feed roller(5) Feed pulley(6) Cassette lift(7) Lift operating plate(8) Upper feed guide(9) Middle feed guide(10) Lower feed guide(11) Feed guide(12) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1
(PFPFCL1)(13) Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2
(PFPFCL2)(14) Paper feeder paper conveying
clutch (PFCCL)
(15) Paper feeder paper switch 1 (PFPSW1)
(16) Paper feeder paper switch 2 (PFPSW2)
(17) Paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW)(18) Paper feeder lift switch 1
(PFLSW1)(19) Paper feeder lift switch 2
(PFLSW2)(20) Paper feeder paper length switch 1
(PFPLSW1)(21) Paper feeder paper length switch 2
(PFPLSW2)(22) Paper feeder paper width switch 1
(PFPWSW1)(23) Paper feeder paper width switch 2
(PFPWSW2)
2-1-1
3J4
Figure 2-1-2
PFCCL
PFFSW
PFPFCL1
PFPSW1
PFPFCL2
PFLSW1PFMPWB
YC1-5YC1-6YC1-14
YC2-1
YC1-7YC1-8YC1-13
YC2-7
PFPSW2 PFLSW2
2-1-2
3J4
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout
Figure 2-2-1 Layout of electrical parts
1. Paper feeder main PWB (PFMPWB) ........... Controls electrical parts.2. Left cover 3 switch (LC3SW) ....................... Breaks the safety circuit when left cover 3 is opened, and resets paper
jam detection.3. Paper feeder paper switch 1 (PFPSW1)...... Detects the presence of paper in cassette 3.4. Paper feeder paper switch 2 (PFPSW2)...... Detects the presence of paper in cassette 4.5. Paper feeder lift switch 1 (PFLSW1)............ Detects the cassette lift of cassette 3 reaching the upper limit.6. Paper feeder lift switch 2 (PFLSW2)............ Detects the cassette lift of cassette 4 reaching the upper limit.7. Paper feeder paper length switch 1
(PFPLSW1).................................................. Detects the length of paper in cassette 3.8. Paper feeder paper length switch 2
(PFPLSW2).................................................. Detects the length of paper in cassette 4.9. Paper feeder paper width switch 1
(PFPWSW1) ................................................ Detects the width of paper in cassette 3.10. Paper feeder paper width switch 2
(PFPWSW2) ................................................ Detects the width of paper in cassette 4.11. Paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) ............. Controls paper feeder paper feed clutch 2.12. Paper feeder drive motor (PFDM)................ Drives the paper feeder.13. Paper feeder lift motor 1 (PFLM1) ............... Drives the cassette lift of cassette 3.14. Paper feeder lift motor 2 (PFLM2) ............... Drives the cassette lift of cassette 4.15. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1
(PFPFCL1)................................................... Primary paper feed from cassette 3.16. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2
(PFPFCL2)................................................... Primary paper feed from cassette 4.17. Paper feeder paper conveying clutch
(PFCCL)....................................................... Conveys paper to the machine.18. Paper feeder cassette heater* (PFCH) ........ Dehumidifies paper.
*Optional.
2 11
17
15
12
164 6
97
1
13
10
18
8
14
3 5
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
2-2-1
3J4
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-2-2
3J4
2-3 Operation of the PWBs
2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB
Figure 2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB diagram
PFDM LC3SW
PFFSW
From the machine
PFMPWB
CPU
(U1)
PFLM1
PFLM2
PFPFCL1
PFPFCL2
PFCCL
PFPSW1
PFPSW2
PFLSW1
PFLSW2
PFPLSW1
PFPLSW2
PFPWSW1
PFPWSW2
2-3-1
3J4
Figure 2-3-2 Paper feeder main PWB silk-screen diagram
YC
51
10
YC6
11 7
1112
12
3
YC4
YC3
YC
2
17
18
12
15
16
YC
1
12
2-3-2
3J4
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionYC1 1 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PFLSW1
Connected to the paper feeder paper switch 1/2, paper feeder lift switch 1/2 and paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2
2 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PFPSW1
3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PFLSW2
4 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PFPSW2
5 UCLLSW I 5/0 V DC PFLSW1: On/Off
6 UCPESW I 0/5 V DC PFPSW1: On/Off
7 LCLLSW I 5/0 V DC PFLSW2: On/Off
8 LCPESW I 0/5 V DC PFPSW2: On/Off
9 SGND - - Ground
10 SGND - - Ground
11 SGND - - Ground
12 SGND - - Ground
13 LFCL REM I 0/24 V DC PFPFCL2: On/Off
14 UFCL REM I 0/24 V DC PFPFCL1: On/Off
15 24VR O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL1
16 24VR O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL2
YC2 1 FCL REM I 0/24 V DC PFCCL: On/Off
Connected to the paper feeder paper conveying clutch, paper feeder feed switch and paper feeder lift motor 1/2
2 24VR O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFCCL
3 PGND - - Ground
4 LLM REM I 24 V DC PFLM2: On/Off
5 PGND - - Ground
6 ULM REM I 24 V DC PFLM1: On/Off
7 LFEED SW I 5 V DC PFFSW: On/Off
8 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PFFSW
9 SGND - - Ground
10 NC - - Not used
11 NC - - Not used
12 NC - - Not used
13 SGND - - Ground
14 SGND - - Ground
15 UP SIG1 I ??? PFPSW1: On/Off
16 LO SIG1 I ??? PFPSW2: On/Off
17 UP SIG2 I ??? PFPSW1: On/Off
18 LO SIG2 I ??? PFPSW2: On/Off
2-3-3
3J4
YC3 1 UP DIG0 I 0/5 V DC PFPWSW1: On/Off
Connected to the paper feeder paper length switch 1/2 and paper feeder paper width switch 1/2
2 UP DIG1 I 0/5 V DC PFPWSW1: On/Off
3 UP DIG2 I 0/5 V DC PFPWSW1: On/Off
4 LO DIG0 I 0/5 V DC PFPWSW2: On/Off
5 LO DIG1 I 0/5 V DC PFPWSW2: On/Off
6 LO DIG2 I 0/5 V DC PFPWSW2: On/Off
7 UPCLE SW I 0/5 V DC PFPLSW1: On/Off
8 LOCLE SW I 0/5 V DC PFPLSW2: On/Off
9 SGND - - Ground
10 SGND - - Ground
11 SGND - - Ground
12 SGND - - Ground
YC4 1 24VR O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFDMConnected to the paper feeder drive motor
2 PGND - - Ground3 ON O 0/5 V DC PFDM: On/Off4 LOCK I 0/5 V DC PFDM lock signal5 CLOCK O 0/5 V DC
(pulse)PFDM clock signal
YC5 1 UFEED SW
Connected to the machine
2 READY
3 SDI
4 SDO
5 SCLK
6 5V
7 SGND - - Ground
8 PGND - - Ground
9 SEL
10 24V
YC6 1 24VR I 24 V DC/0V LC3SW: On/Off
Connected to the left cover 3 switch
2 NC - - Not used
3 24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for LC3SW
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
2-3-4
3J4
2-4-1
List of maintenance parts
Periodic maintenance procedures
Maintenance part name Part No. Alternative part No.
Fig. No.
Ref. No.Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
Feed roller ROLLER,VERTICAL CONVEYING 302AR07421 2AR07421 6 10Feed pulley RIGHT PULLEY,FEED 33906660 - 4,5 36Paper feed pulley PULLEY,PAPER FEED 2AR07220 - 4,5 2Separation pulley PULLEY,SEPARATION 2AR07230 - 4,5 3Forwarding pulley PULLEY FEED A 2BJ06010 - 4,5 5Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 CLUTCH,FEED 32 303J444020 3J444020 6 9Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 CLUTCH,FEED 32 303J444020 3J444020 6 9Paper feeder paper conveying clutch
CLUTCH,FEED 32 303J444020 3J444020 6 9
Section Maintenancepart/location
Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Paper con-veying sec-tion
Push paper sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Surface view sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Upper cover sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Paper conveying sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Adjusting hone position sensor
Cleaning Every time Air brush
Exit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Tray upper limit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Tray lower limit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Reverse sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Exit roller Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Paper conveying belt Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Paper conveying roller Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Paddle Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Front static eliminator Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it.
Rear static eliminator Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it.
Reverse static eliminator
Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it.
Push paper lever cushion
Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
3J4
2-4-2
Wiring diagram
1 7
PFPWSW1
PFPWSW2
2 8 YC3 YC2
4 4 5 3 1 1 UP DIG0 FCL REM 1 1 3 1PFCCL
PFLM1
PFLM2
PFFSW
LC3SW
3 3 6 4 2 2 UP DIG1 2 22 2 7 1 3 3 UP DIG2 24VR 2 2 1 31 1 8 2 9 9 SGND 10 105 5 4 6 11 11
3 5 12 12UP SIG2 17 17 5 5
PFPFCL1
PFPFCL2
1 SGND 13 13 4 42 UP SIG1 15 15 3 3
3 PGND 5 5 2 2ULM REM 6 6 1 1
PFPLSW1
PFPLSW2
2 2 7 7 UPCLE SW1 1 11 11 SGND
1 7 LO SIG2 18 18 5 52 8 SGND 14 14 4 4
4 4 5 3 4 4 LO DIG0 LO SIG1 16 16 3 33 3 6 4 5 5 LO DIG1 PGND 3 3 2 22 2 7 1 6 6 LO DIG2 LLM REM 4 4 1 11 1 8 2 10 10 SGND5 5 4 6 LFEED SW 7 7 3 3 3
3 5 5V 8 8 2 2 2
SGND 9 9 1 1 1
123
2 2 8 7 UPCLE SW1 1 12 11 SGND
YC1
16 16 24VR14 14 UFCL REM
PFPSW1
PFLSW1
PFPSW2
PFLSW2
2 8 15 15 24VR1 1 1 7 13 13 LFCL REM2 2 4 6 2 2 5V
3 3 3 5 6 6 UCPESW
6 4 10 10 SGND
1 1 5 3 1 1 5V
2 2 8 2 5 5 UCLLSW
3 3 7 1 9 9 SGND
YC6
2 8 24VR 1 1 11 1 1 7 2 22 2 4 6 4 4 5V 24V 3
2
3 33 3 3 5 8 8 LCPESW
6 4 12 12 SGND Machine
1 1 5 3 3 3 5V YC5
2 2 8 2 7 7 LCLLSW UFEED SW 1 1 11 11 UFEED SW 8 UFEED SW
3 3 7 1 11 11 SGND READY 2 2 10 10 READY 7 READYSDI 3 3 9 9 SDI 6 SDI
YC4 SDO 4 4 8 8 SDO 5 SDO1 1 1 1 24VR SCLK 5 5 7 7 SCLK 4 SCLK2 2 2 2 PGND 5V 6 6 5 5 SEL 3 SEL
PFDM 3 3 3 3 ON SGND 7 7 4 4 5V 2 5V4 4 4 4 LOCK PGND 8 8 3 3 SGND 1 SGND
5 5 5 5 CLOCK SEL 9 9 2 2 PGND 2 PGND
24V 10 10 1 1 24V 1 24V
PFCH
PFMPWB
1 1 12 12 AC(L) 12 2 6 6 AC(N)
AC(L)AC(N)3
32
1
321
PF-750
5H0
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-11-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-21-1-3 Machine cross section ............................................................................................................................1-1-3
1-2 Installation1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-11-2-2 Unpacking ...............................................................................................................................................1-2-21-2-3 Installing the cassette heaters (option) ...................................................................................................1-2-3
1-3 Maintenance Mode1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1(2) Contents of maintenance mode items...............................................................................................1-3-2
1-4 Troubleshooting1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................................................................................1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ...................................................................................................................1-4-1(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ..................................................................................................1-4-1(3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-2
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-4-4(1) Self-diagnostic function .....................................................................................................................1-4-4(2) Self diagnostic codes ........................................................................................................................1-4-4
1-4-3 Electric problems ....................................................................................................................................1-4-61-4-4 Mechanical problems ..............................................................................................................................1-4-7
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1
(1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-11-5-2 Paper feed section ..................................................................................................................................1-5-2
(1) Detaching and refitting paper feeder separation roller 1 and 2 .........................................................1-5-2(2) Detaching and refitting the paper feeder paper conveying unit assembly.........................................1-5-3(3) Detaching and refitting paper feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2 .......................................................1-5-3(4) Adjusting the position of the center adjuster (center line alignment).................................................1-5-4
2-1 Mechanical construction2-1-1 Mechanical construction .........................................................................................................................2-1-1
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1
(1) PWBs ................................................................................................................................................2-2-1(2) Switches and sensors .......................................................................................................................2-2-2(3) Other electrical components..............................................................................................................2-2-3
2-3 Operation of the PWBs2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB .........................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 AppendixesList of maintenance parts........................................................................................................................2-4-1Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-4-1Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-2
5H0
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 SpecificationsPaper supply method......................Friction retard method (No. sheets: 3000, 80 g/m2)Paper size.......................................11" x 8 1/2", A4Supported paper .............................Weight: 60 - 105 g/m2
Types: standard, recycled, colorPower source..................................Electrically connected to the machineDimensions .....................................23 5/16" (W) x 23 5/8" (D) x 12 3/8" (H)
585 (W) x 600 (D) x 314 (H)mmWeight.............................................Approx. 50.6 lbs. / Approx. 23 kg
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-1-1
5H0
1-1-2 Parts names
Figure 1-1-1
�
�
�
�
�
1. Lifts2. Left cover 33. Cassette 34. Cassette front cover5. Front and rear lateral size adjusters
1-1-2
5H0
1-1-3 Machine cross section
Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section
Paper path
1-1-3
5H0
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-1-4
5H0
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment1. Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.)
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photo-conductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams.Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto the machine.Avoid dust and vibration.Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°).Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photo-conductor, such as mer-cury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.Select a room with good ventilation.
1-2-1
5H0
1-2-2 Unpacking
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking
Caution: Place the machine on a level surface.
1. 3000-sheet paper feeder2. Outer case3. Lower front pad4. Lower rear pad5. Support6. Upper pad7. Stay8. Retainer
9. Pins10. CVM4 x 06 cross-head
binding screws11. M4 x 16 TP screws12. Machine cover13. Plastic bag14. Plastic bag
1-2-2
5H0
1-2-3 Installing the cassette heaters (option)Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:Two (2) cassette heaters (P/N xxxxxxxxxx): for 220 - 240 V specifications onlyTwo (2) cassette heaters (P/N xxxxxxxxxx): for 120 V specifications onlyTwo (2) cassette heater retainers (P/N 5A707690)Six (6) M4 x 6 IT tap-tight (S-tight) screws (P/N 37611570)Relay wire (P/N 5A707890)Ten (10) wire saddles (P/N M2109000)
Procedure1. Remove two screws from each of the right
cover and left cover 3 and then the covers.2. Remove three screws holding the paper
feeder rear cover and then the cover.3. Open the paper feeder.4. Remove two screws holding the paper con-
veying unit assembly and then the assem-bly.
Figure 1-2-2
5. Fit the cassette heaters to the cassette heater retainers using two screws and wire saddle for each.
6. Fit the cassette heater retainers to the left and right of the paper feeder using one screw for each.
Figure 1-2-3
7. Pull the cassette heater cable out to the machine rear through the cable hole.
Screw
ScrewPaper conveying unit assembly
Machine left
Cassette heater
Wire saddle
Cassette heater retainer
Screws
Machine right
Cassette heater retainer
Cassette heaterScrews
Wire saddle
1-2-3
5H0
8. Detach the open connector from the con-nector of the main harness on the machine rear.
Figure 1-2-4
9. Insert the cassette heater connectors into the relay wire connectors.
10. Insert the main harness connector into the relay wire connector.
11. Tidy up the cassette heater cable and relay wire using eight wire saddles and route the cable and wire while clipping the wire sad-dles into the holes in the rear frame.
12. Refit the paper feeder rear cover.13. Refit the right cover and left cover 3.
Figure 1-2-5
Open connector
Wire saddles
Wire saddles
Wire saddlesRelay wire
Wire saddle
1-2-4
5H0
1-3 Maintenance Mode
1-3-1 Maintenance modeThe machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Enter 10871087 using
the numeric keys.
Enter 001 using the cursor
up/down keys or numeric keys
and press the start key.
Enter the maintenance item
number using the cursor up/down keys
or numeric keys.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Press the start key.
Start
End
Maintenance mode is entered.
The maintenance item is
selected.
Maintenance mode is exited.
Repeat the same
maintenance item?
Run another maintenance
item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
1-3-1
5H0
(2) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenanceitem No. Description
U208 Setting the paper size for the paper feederDescriptionSets the size of paper used in 3000-sheet paper feeder.PurposeTo change the setting when the size of paper used in the paper feeder is changed.Setting
1. Press the start key. 2. Select the paper size (A4, B5 or 11 x 8.5).
Initial setting: 11 x 8.5 (Inch specifications)A4 (Metric specifications)
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U247 Checking the operation of 3000-sheet paper feederDescriptionTurns on motors and clutches of 3000-sheet paper feeder.PurposeTo check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device.Method
1. Press the start key..
2. Select the item to be operated.When selecting the motor, the operation starts. To stop the operation, select the item again.When selecting the clutch, each clutch is turned on for 1 s.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U901 Checking copy counts by paper feed locationsDescriptionDisplays copy counts by paper feed locations.PurposeTo check the time to replace consumable parts.Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed.CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Display Motor and clutchesLCF FEED Paper feeder conveying motor (PFCM)CLUTCH B Paper feeder conveying clutch (PFCCL)CLUTCH P1 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1)CLUTCH P2 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2)
Display DescriptionBYPASS MP trayCASSETTE 1 Cassette 1CASSETTE 2 Cassette 2CASSETTE 3 Cassette 3 (3000-sheet paper feeder)CASSETTE 4 -DUPLEX Duplex unit
1-3-2
5H0
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection
(1) Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel.Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the left cover 3 to turn left cover 3 switch off and on.
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
Figure 1-4-1
Section Jam code Conditions Specified time
Paper feed section
12No paper feed from cas-sette 3
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within the specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the speci-fied time.
2393 ms
15Jam in paper feeder hori-zontal paper conveying section 1
Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) does not turn on within spec-ified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) turn-ing on.
963 ms
16Jam in paper feeder hori-zontal paper conveying section 2
Paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) does not turn on within spec-ified time of the paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3) turning on .
1029 ms
17Jam in paper feeder hori-zontal paper conveying section 3
Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1) does not turn on within spec-ified time of the paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2) turning on .
631 ms
19Misfeed in paper feeder paper conveying section
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within specified time of paper feeder feed switch (PFFSW) turning on.
1842 ms
24Multiple sheets in cassette 3 paper feed section
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on.
1867 ms
09Paper feeder sequence error
Sequence error is occurred between the machine and paper feeder.
-
FSW3
PPSENS1
PPSENS3PPSENS2
PFPFCL1
PFPFCL2
1-4-1
5H0
(3) Paper misfeeds
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from cassette 3).Jam code 12
Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper.
Broken feed switch 3 actua-tor.
Check visually and replace switch.
Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Check if the clutch malfunc-tions.
Run maintenance item U247 and select following clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2, paper feeder paper conveying clutch
Electrical problem with clutch.
Check (see page 1-4-6).
(2)A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in 3000-sheet paper feeder horizontal paper con-veying section).Jam code 15
Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper.
Check if the paper side guides are deformed.
Check visually and replace.
Defective paper path sen-sor 3.
With 5 V DC present at CN6-12 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN6-11 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 3 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sensor 3.
Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions.
Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-tus and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2.
Check (see page 1-4-6).
(3)A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in 3000-sheet paper feeder horizontal paper con-veying section).Jam code 16
Paper is extremely curled. Change the paper.
Check if the paper side guides are deformed.
Check visually and replace.
Defective paper path sen-sor 2.
With 5 V DC present at CN6-9 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN6-8 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 2 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sensor 2.
Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions.
Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-tus and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1.
Check (see page 1-4-6).
1-4-2
5H0
(4)A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in 3000-sheet paper feeder horizontal paper con-veying section).Jam code 17
Check if the paper side guides are deformed.
Check visually and replace.
Defective paper path sen-sor 1.
With 5 V DC present at CN6-6 on the paper feeder main PWB, check if CN6-5 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 1 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sensor 1.
Check if paper feeder paper conveying clutch malfunc-tions.
Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper con-veying clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with paper feeder paper convey-ing clutch.
Check (see page 1-4-6).
(5)A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (jam in optional paper feeder vertical paper con-veying section).Jam code 19
Broken feed switch 3 actua-tor.
Check visually and replace switch.
Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
(6)A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in cassette 3).Jam code 24
Broken switch actuator. Check visually and replace switch.
Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Defective paper feeder paper feed clutch 1.
Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-tus and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1.
Check (see page 1-4-6).
Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers.
Check visually and replace.
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
1-4-3
5H0
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem dis-played as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning cover switch off and back on.
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0420 Paper feeder communication errorA communication error from paper feeder is detected 10 times in succes-sion.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector YC33 on the engine PWB and the connector YC1 on the paper feeder main PWB, and the conti-nuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the paper feeder main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct opera-tion.
C1100 Paper feeder lift motor 1 errorA motor over-current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Paper feeder lift motor 1 does not rotate correctly (the motor is over-loaded).
Check the gears and remedy if necessary.
C1110 Paper feeder lift motor 2 errorA motor over-current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Paper feeder lift motor 2 does not rotate correctly (the motor is over-loaded).
Check the gears and remedy if necessary.
C1120 Paper feeder left lift position problemPaper feeder switch 2 does not turn on within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 1 turning on.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective paper feeder lift switch 2.
Check if YC5-7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 2 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 2.
Defective paper feeder lift motor 1.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 1.
The paper feeder left lift does not rise properly.
Check the gears and belts, and remedy if necessary.
1-4-4
5H0
C1130 Paper feeder right lift position prob-lemPaper feeder switch 1 does not turn on within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 2 turning on.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective paper feeder lift switch 1.
Check if YC5-4 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 1 is turned off. If not, replace paper feeder lift switch 1.
Defective paper feeder lift motor 2.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feeder lift motor 2.
The paper feeder right lift does not rise properly.
Check the gears and belts, and remedy if necessary.
C1900 Paper feeder EEPROM errorWhen writing the data, the write data and the read data is not continuously in agreement three times.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective engine PWB.
Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-rect operation (see page 1-5-29).
Defective paper feeder.
Replace the paper feeder with another unit and check the operation. If the operation is normal, replace or repair optional paper feeder.
C2600 Paper feeder paper conveying motor errorThe lock signal of the motor is detected avobe 450 ms.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective drive transmission sys-tem.
Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any.
Defective PWB. Replace the paper feeder main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct opera-tion.
Defective paper feeder paper con-veying motor.
Replace the paper feeder paper conveying motor.
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1-4-5
5H0
1-4-3 Electric problems
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(1)The paper feeder does not operate when the main power switch is turned on.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
(2)The paper feeder paper conveying motor does not oper-ate.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Broken the gear. Check visually and replace the gear if necessary.
Defective paper feeder paper conveying motor.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if the paper feeder paper conveying motor operates when CN2-2 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder paper conveying motor.
Defective paper feeder main PWB.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if CN2-2 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder main PWB.
(3)The lift motor 1/2 does not operate.
Broken motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective paper feeder main PWB.
Check if CN7-13 or CN7-6 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low right after the cassette is installed. If not, replace the paper feeder main PWB.
(4)The paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2 or paper feeder paper conveying clutch does not oper-ate.
Broken clutch coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the clutch.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective paper feeder main PWB.
Run maintenance item U247 and check if following terminals on the paper feeder main PWB goes low. If not, replace the paper feeder main PWB.Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1: CN4-3Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2: CN4-1Paper feeder paper conveying clutch: CN4-5
1-4-6
5H0
1-4-4 Mechanical problems
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)No primary paper feed.
Check if the paper feeder separation roller 1 or 2 is soiled with paper powder.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Check if paper feeder paper feed roller 1 or 2 is soiled with paper powder.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Check if the paper feeder separation roller 1 or 2 is worn or deformed.
Replace (see page 1-5-2).
Check if paper feeder paper feed roller 1 or 2 is worn or deformed.
Replace (see page 1-5-3).
Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1, 2 or the paper feeder paper conveying clutch malfunctions.
Remedy or replace.
(2)Skewed paper feed.
Check if the paper feeder separation roller 1 or 2 is worn or deformed.
Replace (see page 1-5-2).
Check if dpaper feeder paper feed roller 1 or 2 is worn or deformed.
Replace (see page 1-5-3).
Check if the paper side guides are deformed. Remedy or replace.
(3)Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time.
Check if the paper is excessively curled. Change the paper.
Paper is not loaded correctly. Correct.
Check if the paper feeder separation roller 1 or 2 is worn or deformed.
Replace (see page 1-5-2).
(4)Paper jams.
Check if the paper is excessively curled. Change the paper.
Check if the paper side guides are deformed. Remedy or replace.
(5)Abnormal noise is heard.
Check if rollers and gears operate smoothly. Grease the bushings and gears.
Check for any abnormality with motors and clutches.
Replace.
Check for any drive belt out of place. Remedy if necessary.
1-4-7
5H0
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-4-8
5H0
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly
(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk.When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge.Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.When replacing battery on a PWB, dispose properly according to laws and regulations.
1-5-1
5H0
1-5-2 Paper feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting paper feeder separation roller 1 and 2
Clean or replace paper feeder separation roller 1, 2 as follows.
Procedure1. Open left cover 3.2. Remove stop ring 1.3. Remove the shaft.4. Remove the paper feeder separation roller
assembly.5. Remove stop ring 2 securing paper feeder
separation roller 2 and then the roller.6. Remove stop ring 3 securing paper feeder
separation roller 1 and then the roller.7. Clean or replace paper feeder separation
roller 1 and 2.8. Refit all removed parts.
Figure 1-5-1
Stop ring 1
Paper feeder separation roller 2
Paper feeder
separation roller 1
Shaft
Stop ring 2
Stop ring 3
Stop ring 1
paper feeder separation roller assembly
1-5-2
5H0
(2) Detaching and refitting the paper feeder paper conveying unit assembly
Replace the desk upper or lower paper width switches as follows.
Procedure1. Open the cassette.2. Remove left cover 3.3. Remove two screws holding the paper
feeder paper conveying unit assembly and then the assembly.
Figure 1-5-2
(3) Detaching and refitting paper feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2
Clean or replace paper feed roller 1, 2 as follows.
Procedure1. Turn the paper feeder paper conveying unit
over.2. Remove the stop ring while lifting the paper
feed roller section.3. Pull out the shifting shaft and then paper
feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2.4. Clean or replace paper feeder paper feed
rollers 1 and 2.5. Refit all removed parts.
Figure 1-5-3
Paper feeder
paper conveying
unit assembly
Screw
Screw
Paper feeder
paper feed roller 1
Paper feeder
paper feed roller 2
Shifting shaft
Stop rings
1-5-3
5H0
(4) Adjusting the position of the center adjuster (center line alignment)
Perform the following adjustment if the center lines of the copy image and the copy paper are misaligned.
Procedure1. Connect the power plug to the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.2. Run maintenance item 034 and output the test pattern.3. If the center of the paper and that of the test pattern output do not meet the reference value,
perform the following adjustment.<Reference value> Deviation to the left or right: 1.5 mm or less
4. Pull out the cassette of the paper feeder and loosen the three screws securing the adjuster.If the test pattern output looks like A, move the adjuster in the direction of the black arrow ( ) and retighten the three screws.If the test pattern output looks like B, move the adjuster in the direction of the white arrow ( ) and retighten the three screws.
Figure 1-5-4
5. Close the cassette.6. Output a test pattern again.7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until the centers of the paper and the test pattern meet the reference value.
<Reference value> Deviation to the left or right: 1.5 mm or less8. If the position of the adjuster is changed, adjust the front cover position.
If the front cover position is not proper, the cassette may not be fixed with the magnet or the gap between the front cover and the paper feeder may be opened.
9. Loosen the five screws.10. Move the position of the front cover by the amount of divisions of the level that corresponds to
the movement of the adjuster (amount of movement of the level) using the level.11. Retighten the five screws
Figure 1-5-5
Adjuster Screw ScrewScrew
A B
Screws Screws
ScrewFront cover
DivisionsDivisions
DivisionsDivisions Divisions
Adjuster
1-5-4
5H0
2-1 Mechanical construction
2-1-1 Mechanical constructionThe paper feeder consists mainly of the left and right cassettes and separation section.The left cassette paper feed section sends paper from the lift to paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2. When the left cas-sette becomes empty, the right cassette paper feed section conveys paper onto the lift of the left cassette.The paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2 in the separation section convey paper received from the left cassette paper feed section into the machine, preventing multiple sheets from being fed at one time.
Figure 2-1-1
(1) Paper feeder paper feed roller 1(2) Paper feeder paper feed roller 2(3) Pickup arm(4) Paper conveying base(5) Lift(6) Paper guide U(7) Left cover 3(8) Paper feeder separation roller 1
(9) Paper feeder separation roller 2(10) Paper guide D(11) Guide pulley(12) Air damper(13) Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1)(14) Paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2)(15) Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3)(16) Paper empty sensor (PESENS)
2-1-1
5H0
Left cassette paper feedAs the paper feeder paper conveying clutch (PFCCL) turns on, the drive is transmitted to paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2, starting paper feed from the left cassette.The paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2 ensure that the paper is fed one sheet at a time and that it is fed into the machine correctly. To prevent multiple sheets from being fed, there is a torque limiter on paper feeder separation roller 2.When the left cassette is empty, its lift serves as a guide for the paper being conveyed from the right cassette lift.
Figure 2-1-2 Left cassette paper feed section
Figure 2-1-3 Left cassette paper feed section block diagram
Paper path
PFCCL
Paper feeder separation roller 1
Machine
Paper feeder
separation
roller 2
PFCCL
CN4-5
PFMPWB
PFCCL
2-1-2
5H0
Right cassette paper feedAs the last sheet in the left cassette is fed, paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) and paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turn on for paper feed from the right cassette. Paper feeder paper feed rollers 1 and 2 start to rotate to convey paper from the right cassette onto the left cassette lift.
Figure 2-1-4 Right cassette paper feed section
Figure 2-1-5 Right cassette paper feed section block diagram
PPSENS1
PPSENS2 PPSENS3
PFPFCL1 PFPFCL2
Paper feeder
paper feed roller 1
Paper feeder
paper feed roller 2
Paper path
PPSENS1 PPSENS2 PPSENS3
PFPFCL1 PFPFCL2
PPSENS1
PPSENS2
PPSENS3
PFPFCL2
PFPFCL1
CN6-5
CN6-8
CN6-11
CN4-1
CN4-3
PFMPWB
2-1-3
5H0
Raising and lowering the liftsThe following is a description of the right cassette lift operating mechanism. The left cassette lift operates in the same manner.Lift motor 2 (LM2) drives the right lift belt assembly that winches the belt up and hence raises the lift until it is stopped by level switch 2 (LSW2).When paper is loaded on the lift and the deck is closed, the lift is raised until level switch 2 (LSW2) turns on.When level switch 2 (LSW2) is turned off as the paper on the lift is used, lift motor 2 (LM2) starts to raise the lift until the switch turns on.
Figure 2-1-6 Raising and lowering the lift
When the cassette is opened for removing a jammed paper or other purposes, the winch shaft is released from its holder on lift motor 2 (LM2), allowing the lift to descend under its own weight. The air damper buffers the impact of the descend-ing lift.
Figure 2-1-7 Lift block diagram
Level switch 2
Air damper Lift belt assembly
Winch shaft
Lift
Lift motor 2
LSW1
LSW2
LM1
LM2
CN5-4
CN5-7
CN7-13
CN7-6
PFMPWB
LM2
LSW1 LSW2
LM1
2-1-4
5H0
Detecting the paper levelThe lift rises as paper in the cassette is used.When the remaining number of sheets in either right or left cassette reduces to around 100 to 250 sheets, the projection on the lift belt assembly pushes against the sensor lever which turns the relevant paper level detection sensor 1 or 2 (PLDSENS1/2) on.When both paper level detection sensors 1 and 2 (PLDSENS1/2) have turned on, the message [Low on paper.] is shown on the machine message display. This message is not shown when only one of them is on.As more copies are made with the message on, paper path sensors 1, 2 and 3 (PPSENS1/2/3) or the paper empty sensor (PESENS) start to detect absence of paper, and the message [Add paper in cassette 3.(Add paper cassette 3.)] is shown.
Figure 2-1-8 Detecting the paper level
Figure 2-1-9 Paper level detection system block diagram
Paper level detection sensor1 or 2 (PLDSENS1/2)
Sensor lever
Lift belt assembly
CN2-1
CN3-3
PFMPWB
PLDSENS1 PLDSENS2
2-1-5
5H0
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-1-6
5H0
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout
(1) PWBs
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs
1. Paper feeder main PWB (PFMPWB) ........... Controls electrical components and communications with the machine.2. Sensor relay PWB (SENRYPWB)................
1
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
2-2-1
5H0
(2) Switches and sensors
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors
1. Paper path sensor 1 (PPSENS1)................. Detect paper jams and the absence of paper on the lifts.2. Paper path sensor 2 (PPSENS2)................. Detect paper jams and the absence of paper on the lifts.3. Paper path sensor 3 (PPSENS3)................. Detect paper jams and the absence of paper on the lifts.4. Paper empty sensor (PESENS)................... Detects the absence of paper in the right cassette.5. Level switch 1 (LSW1) ................................. Detects the left cassette lift in the home position.6. Level switch 2 (LSW2) ................................. Detects the right cassette lift in the home position.7. Left cover 3 switch (LC3SW) ....................... Detects if left cover 3 is open or closed.8. Paper feeder open/closed safety switch
(PFOSSW) ................................................... Detects if the paper feeder is open or closed.9. Paper level detection sensor 1
(PLDSENS1)................................................ Detects the paper level in the left cassette.10. Paper level detection sensor 2
(PLDSENS2)................................................ Detects the paper level in the right cassette.
7
1
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
2 5 3 8 4 6
9 10
2-2-2
5H0
(3) Other electrical components
Figure 2-2-3 Other electrical components
1. Paper feeder paper conveying clutch(PFCCL)....................................................... Regulates drive transmission to paper feeder separation rollers 1 and 2.
2. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1(PFPFCL1)................................................... Regulates drive transmission to paper feeder paper feed roller 1.
3. Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2(PFPFCL2)................................................... Regulates drive transmission to paper feeder paper feed roller 2.
4. Paper feeder paper conveying motor(PFCM) ........................................................ Drives the paper feeder.
5. Lift motor 1 (LM1)......................................... Raises the left cassette lift.6. Lift motor 2 (LM2)......................................... Raises the right cassette lift.7. Paper feeder cassette heater 1* (PFCH1) ... Dehumidifies paper in the left cassette.8. Paper feeder cassette heater 2* (PFCH2) ... Dehumidifies paper in the right cassette.
*Optional.
7
1
4
32
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
85 6
2-2-3
5H0
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-2-4
5H0
2-3 Operation of the PWBs
2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB
Figure 2-3-1 Paper feeder main PWB diagram
PF RXD
PF TXD
From the machine
24 V DC5 V DCPGND
SGND
PFCM
LM1
LM2
LM1
drive circuit
Paper feeder
paper
conveying
motor drive
circuit
Communication
circuitLatch
CPU
(IC8)
PFMPWB
LED
drive circuit
ROM
PPSENS1
PPSENS2
PPSENS3
PESENS
LSW1
PFOSSW
LSW2
LC3SW
Oscillator
circuit
PFPFCL1
PFPFCL2
PFCCL
LM2
drive circuit
Reset circuit
PLDSENS2
PLDSENS1
PFSCL
Clutch
drive circuit
SENRYPWB
2-3-1
5H0
Figure 2-3-2 Paper feeder main PWB silk-screen diagram
19
CN
1
1
13
15
CN6CN3
CN
4
16
10
1
CN
3
17
8 1
CN2
2-3-2
5H0
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionCN1 1 FEED SW SIG I 0/5 V DC FSW3 On/Off signal from the machine
Connected to the machine
2 READY O 0/5 V DC Ready signal to the machine
3 SDO(IN) I 0/5 V DC (pulse)
Serial communication signal from the machine
4 SDO(OUT) O 0/5 V DC (pulse)
Serial communication signal to the machine
5 CLK I 0/5 V DC (pulse)
Clock signal from the machine
6 SELECT I 0/5 V DC Select signal from the machine
7 DC5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power supply
8 SGND - - Signal ground
9 PGND - - Power ground
10 DC24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power supply
CN2 1 RS1_3 I 0/5 V DC PLDSENS1: On/Off
Connected to the paper level detec-tion sensor 1 and paper feeder paper conveying motor
2 SGND - - Signal ground
3 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PLDSENS1
4 PGND - - Power ground
5 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFCM
6 MOT_ON O 0/24 V DC PFCM: On/Off
7 LD I 0/5 V DC (pulse)
PFCM lock signal
CN3 1 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PLDSENS2Connected to the paper level detec-tion sensor 2
2 SGND - - Signal ground3 RS2_3 I 0/5 V DC PLDSENS2: On/Off
YC4 1 P2_CL O 0/24 V DC PFPFCL2: On/Off
Connected to the paper feeder paper feed clutch 1/2, paper feeder paper conveying clutch and paper feeder separation clutch
2 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL2
3 P1_CL O 0/24 V DC PFPFCL1: On/Off
4 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFPFCL1
5 B_CL O 0/24 V DC PFCCL: On/Off
6 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFCCL
7 B_CL O 0/24 V DC PFSCL: On/Off
8 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for PFSCL
CN5 1 FRONT_COVER I 5/0 V DC PFOSSW: On/Off
Connected to the sen-sor relay PWB and level switch 2
2 SGND - - Signal ground
3 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for SENRYPWB
4 LEVEL_S1 I 0/5 V DC LSW1: On/Off
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 N.C. - - Not used
7 LEVEL_S2 I 0/5 V DC LSW2: On/Off
8 SGND - - Signal ground
9 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for LSW2
2-3-3
5H0
CN6 1 SIDE_COVER I 5/0 V DC LC3SW: On/Off
Connected to the paper path sensor 1/2/3 and paper empty sensor
2 SGND - - Signal ground
3 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for LC3SW
4 PPS0_CLK O 5/4 V DC (pulse)
PPSENS1 clock signal
5 PPS0 I 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V DC
PPSENS1: On/Off
6 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PPSENS1
7 PPS1_CLK O 5/4 V DC (pulse)
PPSENS2 clock signal
8 PPS1 I 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V DC
PPSENS2: On/Off
9 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PPSENS2
10 PPS2_CLK O 5/4 V DC (pulse)
PPSENS3 clock signal
11 PPS2 I 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V DC
PPSENS3: On/Off
12 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PPSENS3
13 EMP_S_CLK O 5/4 V DC (pulse)
PESENS clock signal
14 EMP_S I 5/0 V DC (pulse)/0 V DC
PESENS: On/Off
15 DC5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply for PESENS
CN7 1 RS2_2 I 0/5 V DC LM2: On/Off
Connected to the Lift motor 1/2
2 SGND - - Signal ground
3 RS2_1 I 0/5 V DC LM2: On/Off
4 NC - - Not used
5 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for LM2
6 LMOT2 I 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off
7 NC - - Not used
8 RS1_2 I 0/5 V DC LM1: On/Off
9 SGND - - Signal ground
10 RS1_1 I 0/5 V DC LM1: On/Off
11 NC - - Not used
12 DC24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC supply for LM1
13 LMOT1 O 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
2-3-4
5H0
2-4-1
2-4 Appendixes
List of maintenance parts
Periodic maintenance procedures
Maintenance part name Part No. Alternative part No.
Fig. No.
Ref. No.Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
Push paper sensor H-PICK ROLLER 5A707600 - 3 22Surface view sensor PULLEY,PAPER FEED 5FH06010 - 3 49Upper cover sensor PULLEY,SEPARATION 5FH06020 - 3 42Paper conveying sensor C-PICK PULLEY 5A707580 - 2 18Paper path sensor 1/2/3 TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 3 9Paper empty sensor SNS-SPI-338 5A707980 - 3 3Level switch 1/2 SNS-SPI-338 5A707980 - 3 3Paper feeder open/closed safety switch
SNS-SPI-338 5A707980 - 3 3
Section Maintenancepart/location
Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Paper con-veying sec-tion
Push paper sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Surface view sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Upper cover sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Paper conveying sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Adjusting hone position sensor
Cleaning Every time Air brush
Exit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Tray upper limit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Tray lower limit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Reverse sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Exit roller Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Paper conveying belt Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Paper conveying roller Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Paddle Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Front static eliminator Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it.
Rear static eliminator Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it.
Reverse static eliminator
Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it.
Push paper lever cushion
Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
5H0
2-4-2
Wiring diagram
PFPFCL22
2 1
1
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
1
2 2
1
1
2
3
4
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
PFPFCL12
2 1
1
PFCCL
PFOSSW
2
2 1
1
PFSCL2
2 1
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
LSW1
LSW2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
LC3SW
1
2
3
1
2
3
PPSENS1
PPSENS2
PPSENS3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
PESENS
1
2
3
1
2
3
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
RD
RD
RD
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
RD
RD
RD
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24 V
PG
ND
SG
ND
5.1
V
*RE
SE
T
NC
PF
TX
D
SG
ND
PF
RX
D
SG
ND
FS
W3 S
IG
NC
24 V
PG
ND
SG
ND
5 V
*RE
SE
T
PF
TX
D
SG
ND
PF
RX
D
SG
ND
FS
W3 S
IG
CN2
LD
CM
24 V
PGND
5 V
SGND
PLDSENS1
CN7
LM2 SW2
SGND
LM2 SW1
NC
24 V
LM2
NC
LM1 SW2
SGND
LM1 SW1
NC
24 V
LM1
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN3
5 V
SGND
PLDSENS2
CN4
PFPFCL2
24 V
PFPFCL1
24 V
PFCCL
24 V
CN5
PFOSSW
SGND
5 V
LSW1
SGND
5 V
LSW2
SGND
5 V
NC
CN6
LC3SW
SGND
5 V
PPSENS1 CLK
PPSENS1
5 V
PPSENS2 CLK
PPSENS2
5 V
PPSENS3 CLK
PPSENS3
5 V
PESENS CLK
PESENS
5 V
Wire color Mark
Brown
Yellow
Blue
White
Red
Orange
Light blue
Gray
Black
Purple
BN
YW
BE
WE
RD
OE
LB
GY
BK
PE
Machine
PFCH1 PFCH2
YW
BE
GY
RD
BK
LB
GY
OE
GY
BN
CN1
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
PFCM
LM2
PLDSENS1
PLDSENS2
LM1
PFMPWB
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
EW
WE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
Drawer connectors
PE
PE
PE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
DF-730
5H1
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-11-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-21-1-3 Machine cross section ............................................................................................................................1-1-3
1-2 Installation1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-11-2-2 Unpacking and installation ......................................................................................................................1-2-2
(1) Installation procedure ........................................................................................................................1-2-2(2) Remove the tapes and pad ...............................................................................................................1-2-3
1-3 Maintenance Mode1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1(2) Contents of maintenance mode items...............................................................................................1-3-2
1-4 Troubleshooting1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................................................................................1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ...................................................................................................................1-4-1(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ..................................................................................................1-4-1(3) Paper misfeeds .................................................................................................................................1-4-3
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-4-5(1) Self-diagnostic function .....................................................................................................................1-4-5(2) Self diagnostic codes ........................................................................................................................1-4-5
1-4-3 Electric problems ....................................................................................................................................1-4-71-4-4 Mechanical problems ..............................................................................................................................1-4-9
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1
(1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1(2) Cleaning the paper conveying roller and reverse exit roller ..............................................................1-5-2
2-1 Mechanical construction2-1-1 Mechanical construction .........................................................................................................................2-1-1
(1) Reverse section.................................................................................................................................2-1-1(2) Processing section ...........................................................................................................................2-1-6(3) Exit tray section ...............................................................................................................................2-1-10
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1
(1) PWBs ................................................................................................................................................2-2-1(2) Switches and sensors .......................................................................................................................2-2-2(3) Motors ...............................................................................................................................................2-2-3(4) Solenoids...........................................................................................................................................2-2-4(5) Stapler section...................................................................................................................................2-2-5
2-3 Operation of the PWBs2-3-1 Finisher main PWB .................................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-4 AppendixesTiming chart No.1....................................................................................................................................2-4-1Timing chart No.2....................................................................................................................................2-4-2Timing chart No.3....................................................................................................................................2-4-3List of maintenance parts........................................................................................................................2-4-4Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-4-5Wiring diagram........................................................................................................................................2-4-6
5H1
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 SpecificationsType ................................................Floor modelNumber of trays ..............................One trayTray capacity...................................When not stapling:
A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 500 sheetsA4R, A4, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 1000 sheets**A4R and 8 1/2" x 11" during sorting or offset ejection: 500 sheets(For B5R, job offset is not available.)When stapling 2 or 9 sheets:A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 70 to 28 setsA4R, A4, B5, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 70 to 50 setsWhen stapling 10 or 20 sheets:A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 25 to 12 setsA4R, A4, B5, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 45 to 16 setsWhen stapling 21 or 30 sheets:A4R, A4, B5, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 45 to 16 sets
Stapling limit....................................A3, B4 (257 mm x 364 mm), Folio, 11" x 17" or 8 1/2" x 14": 20 sheetsA4R, A4, 8 1/2" x 11" or 11" x 8 1/2": 30 sheets
Power source..................................Electrically connected to the machineDimensions .....................................558 (W) x 526 (D) x 916 (H) mm
22" (W) x 20 11/16" (D) x 36 1/16" (H)Weight.............................................Approx. 25 kg/55 lbs (with attachments)
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-1-1
5H1
1-1-2 Parts names
Figure 1-1-1
1. Exit tray2. Exit tray extension3. Finisher release button4. Reverse cover5. Upper cover6. Stapler cover7. Staple holder
1-1-2
5H1
1-1-3 Machine cross section
Figure 1-1-2 Machine cross section
1. Reverse section2. Processing section3. Exit tray section
1-1-3
5H1
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-1-4
5H1
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment1. Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.)
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photo-conductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams.Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto the machine.Avoid dust and vibration.Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°).Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photo-conductor, such as mer-cury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.Select a room with good ventilation.
1-2-1
5H1
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation
(1) Installation procedure
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking
Caution: Place the machine on a level surface.
1. Document finisher2. Latch catch3. Rail retainer4. Guide rail5. Joints6. Outer case7. Top plate8. Pad9. Pad10. Pad11. Pad12. Pad
13. Pad14. Pad15. Pad16. Hinge joints17. Skid18. Pad19. Supports20. Installation guide21. Clamp22. M4 x 6 binding screws23. M4 x 10 binding screws
1-2-2
5H1
(2) Remove the tapes and pad
When installing the machine, be sure to remove the following tapes and pad.
1. Remove the two tapes holding the reverse cover.
2. Remove the two tapes holding the reverse guide.
3. Remove the tape holding the upper cover.4. Open the upper cover and remove the pad.5. Remove the tape holding the exit tray exten-
sion.6. Open the stapler cover and remove the tape
holding the stapler.7. Remove the tape holding the signal cable
and the air mat.
Figure 1-2-2
TapeTape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Air mat
Tape
Tape
1-2-3
5H1
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-2-4
5H1
1-3 Maintenance Mode
1-3-1 Maintenance modeThe machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys.
Enter 001 using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys
and press the start key.
Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys
or numeric keys.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Press the start key.
Start
End
Maintenance mode is entered.
The maintenance item is selected.
Maintenance mode is exited.
Repeat the same maintenance item?
Run another maintenance item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
1-3-1
5H1
(2) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenanceitem No. Description
U905 Checking counts by optional devicesDescriptionDisplays the counts of optional DP or finisher.PurposeTo check the use of optional DP and finisher.Method
1. Press the start key.2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed.
DP
FINISHER (document finisher)
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Display DescriptionADP Number of single-sided originals that has passed through the DPRADP Number of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
Display DescriptionCP CNT Number of copies that has passedSTAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activatedPUNCH -STACK -SADDLE -
1-3-2
5H1
1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection
(1) Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel.To remove the jammed paper, detach the finisher from the machine.To reset the paper misfeed detection, turn the joint switch (JSW) off and on.
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
Figure 1-4-1
PES1
PES2REVS
PCS
EXS
1-4-1
5H1
Section Jam code Conditions Specified time
Finisher 81Paper entry sensor nonar-rival jam
The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned on even if a speci-fied time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received.
2627ms
82Jam in stapler
The staple home position sensor (STSPS) is not turned on within the specified time when driving the staple motor (STM).
1s
83Exit sensor stay jam
In the straight mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on.
1680ms
In the offset or staple mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned off within specified time of its turning on.
5375ms
91Finisher cover open
The front cover, top cover or tray C is opened when starting the finisher operation.The centerfold unit top cover is opened when starting the cen-terfold operation.The mail box cover is opened when starting the operation.
-
92Exit sensor non-arrival jam
In the straight mode, the exit sensor (EXS) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the paper entry sen-sor (PES) was turned on.
1770ms
93Reverse sensor jam
The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn on within specified time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning on.
1071ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned on within specified time.
435ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) does not turn off within specified time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning off.
622ms
The reverse sensor (REVS) is not turned off within specified time its turning on.
Depends on paper size
94Paper entry sensor stay/remaining jam
The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned off within specified time its turning on.
Depends on paper size
95Paper conveying sensor jam
The paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn on within specified time of reverse sensor (REVS) turning on.
735ms
The paper conveying sensor (PCS) does not turn off within specified time of reverse sensor (REVS) turning off.
1004ms
1-4-2
5H1
(3) Paper misfeeds
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)A paper jam in docu-ment finisher is indi-cated during copying (paper jam during paper insertion to the finisher).Jam code 81
Extremely curled paper. Change the paper.
Defective paper entry sen-sor.
With 5 V DC present at CN14-1 and CN14-3 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-2and CN14-4 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper entry sensor.)
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
(2)A paper jam in docu-ment finisher is indi-cated during copying (finisher stapler jam).Jam code 82
Defective staple home posi-tion sensor.
Run maintenance item U241 and turn the taple home position sensor on and off manually. Replace the sensor if indication of the corresponding sensor on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
(3)A paper jam in docu-ment finisher is indi-cated during copying (eject sensor stay jam).Jam code 83
Defective eject sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN5-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN5-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the eject sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the eject sen-sor.
Check if the paper convey-ing motor malfunctions.
Check and remedy.
Check if the exit roller and exit pulley contact each other.
Check and remedy.
Check if the exit guide is deformed.
Check and remedy.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
(4)A paper jam in docu-ment finisher is indi-cated during copying (eject sensor non-arrival jam).Jam code 92
Defective eject sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN5-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN5-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the exit sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the exit sensor.
Check if the paper convey-ing motor malfunctions.
Check.
Check if the exit roller and exit pulley contact each other.
Check and remedy.
Check if the exit guide is deformed.
Check and remedy.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-3
5H1
(5)A paper jam in docu-ment finisher is indi-cated during copying (reverse sensor jam).Jam code 93
Defective reverse sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN14-5 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-7 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the reverse sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the reverse sensor.
Check if the reverse motor malfunctions.
Check.
Check if the reverse roller and reverse pulley contact each other.
Check and remedy.
Check if the reverse guide is deformed.
Check and remedy.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
(6)A paper jam in docu-ment finisher is indi-cated during copying (paper entry sensor stay jam).Jam code 94
Extremely curled paper. Change the paper.
Defective paper entry sen-sor.
With 5 V DC present at CN14-1and CN14-3 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-2 and CN14-4 on the main PCB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper entry sensor.
Check if the paper entry guide is deformed.
Check and remedy.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
(7)A paper jam in docu-ment finisher is indi-cated during copying (paper conveying sensor jam).Jam code 95
Defective paper conveying sensor.
With 5 V DC present at CN4-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN4-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying sensor.
Check if the paper convey-ing motor malfunctions.
Check.
Check if the paper convey-ing roller and paper convey-ing pulley contact each other.
Check and remedy.
Check if the paper convey-ing guide is deformed.
Check and remedy.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
1-4-4
5H1
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem dis-played as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning cover switch off and back on.
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0440 Document finisher communication problemA communication error from document finisher is detected 10 times in succes-sion.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector YC33 on the engine PWB and the connector on the finisher main PWB, and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation.
C8030 Tray upper limit detection problemWhen the tray elevation motor raises a tray, the ON status of the tray upper limit sensor is detected.
The tray upper limit sensor/push paper sensor/surface view sensor con-nector makes poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-nuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective tray upper limit sensor/push paper sensor/surface view sen-sor.
Replace the sensor.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
C8140 Tray elevation motor problemWhen the tray elevation motor is driving, the ON status of the tray lower limit sen-sor or surface view sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed.
The tray elevation motor connector makes poor con-tact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-nuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
The tray elevation motor malfunc-tions.
Replace the tray elevation motor.
The tray lower limit sensor/push paper sensor/surface view sensor con-nector makes poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-nuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective tray lower limit sensor/push paper sensor/surface view sen-sor.
Replace the sensor.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-4-5
5H1
C8170 Adjustment motor problemWhen the adjustment motor is driving, the ON status of the adjustment home position sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed.When adjustment operation starts, the ON status of the adjustment home posi-tion sensor is not detected.
The adjustment motor connector makes poor con-tact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-nuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective adjust-ment motor.
Replace adjustment motor.
The adjustment home position sen-sor connector makes poor con-tact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-nuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective adjust-ment home posi-tion sensor.
Replace the adjustment home position sen-sor.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
C8210 Stapler problemWhen the stapler motor is driving, the ON status of the stapler home position sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed.
The stapler con-nector makes poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-nuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
The stapler is blocked with a sta-ple.
Remove the stapler cartridge, and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the sta-pler.
The stapler is bro-ken.
Replace the stapler and check for correct operation.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
C8440 Sensor adjusting problemThe sensor cannot be adjusted within the specified range.
The paper entry sensor connector makes poor con-tact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-nuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective paper entry sensor.
Replace the paper entry sensor and check for correct operation.
The optical path of the paper entry sensor is blocked by foreign matter.
Remove the foreign matter.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
C8460 EEPROM problemReading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed.
Defective EEPROM or fin-isher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1-4-6
5H1
1-4-3 Electric problems
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(1)The reverse motor does not operate.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective reverse motor. Check if the reverse motor rotates when 24 V DC is present at CN15-1 and CN15-2, and drive pulses are at CN15-3, CN15-4, CN15-5 and CN15-6 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace the reverse motor.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Check if CN15-3, CN15-4, CN15-5 and CN15-6 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(2)The paper convey-ing motor does not operate.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective paper conveying motor.
Check if the paper conveying motor rotates when 24 V DC is present at CN7-5 and CN7-6, and drive pulses are at CN7-1, CN7-2, CN7-3 and CN7-4 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace the paper conveying motor.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Check if CN7-1, CN7-2, CN7-3 and CN7-4 on the finisher main PWB go low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(3)The adjustment motor does not oper-ate.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective adjustment motor. Check if the adjustment motor rotates when drive pulses are at CN8-1, CN8-2, CN8-3 and CN8-4 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace the adjustment motor.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Check if CN8-1, CN8-2, CN8-3 and CN8-4 on the finisher main PWB go low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(4)The tray elevation motor does not oper-ate.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective tray elevation motor.
Check if the tray elevation motor rotates when 24 V DC is present at CN11-7 and CN11-8 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace the tray elevation motor.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Check if 24 V DC is present at CN11-7 and CN11-8 on the finisher main PWB. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(5)The separate sole-noid does not oper-ate.
Defective separate solenoid coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the separate solenoid.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Check if CN12-3 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(6)The flapper solenoid does not operate.
Defective flapper solenoid coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the flapper solenoid.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Check if CN12-1 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(7)The large gear sole-noid does not oper-ate.
Defective large gear sole-noid coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the large gear solenoid.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Check if CN17-2 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
1-4-7
5H1
(8)The paddle solenoid does not operate.
Defective paddle solenoid coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paddle solenoid.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Check if CN9-2 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(9)The surface view solenoid does not operate.
Defective surface view solenoid coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the surface view solenoid.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Check if CN6-2 and CN6-3 on the finisher main PWB goes low. If not, replace the finisher main PWB.
(10)Paper jams when the main power switch is turned on.
A piece of paper torn from an paper is caught around the paper entry sensor, reverse sensor, paper con-veying sensor or exit sen-sor.
Check visually and remove it, if any.
Defective paper entry sen-sor.
With 5 V DC present at CN14-1and CN14-3 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-2 and CN14-4 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper entry sensor.
Defective reverse sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN14-5 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN14-7 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the reverse sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the reverse sensor.
Defective paper conveying sensor.
With 5 V DC present at CN4-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN4-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying sensor.
Defective exit sensor. With 5 V DC present at CN5-4 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN5-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the exit sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the exit sensor.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
(11)[Out of staples. Add staples.] is displayed when the main power switch is turned on.
Defective stapler empty sensor.
With 5 V DC present at CN10-6 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN10-6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the stapler empty sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the stapler empty sensor.
Poor contact in the connec-tor terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Defective stapler cartridge sensor.
With 5 V DC present at CN10-5 on the finisher main PWB, check if CN10-5 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the stapler cartridge sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the stapler cartridge sensor.
Defective finisher main PWB.
Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1-4-8
5H1
1-4-4 Mechanical problems
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)No paper conveying.
Paper outside specifications is used. Use only paper conforming to the specifica-tions.
Check if the surfaces of the paper conveying roller, paper conveying pulleys, reverse roller and reverse pulleys are soiled with paper powder.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol, if they are soiled.
Check if the paper conveying roller, paper conveying pulleys, reverse roller and reverse pulleys are deformed.
Replace any deformed or worn pulleys or roller.
(2)No paper ejection to the exit tray.
Paper outside specifications is used. Use only paper conforming to the specifica-tions.
Check if the surfaces of the exit roller and pul-leys are soiled with paper powder.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol, if they are soiled.
Check if the exit roller and pulleys are deformed.
Replace any deformed or worn pulleys or roller.
(3)Paper jams.
Paper outside specifications is used. Use only paper conforming to the specifica-tions.
Check if the paper is extremely curled. Change the paper.
Check if the paper conveying roller and pul-leys, or reverse roller and pulleys make proper contact.
Remedy if there are any problems.
Check if the exit roller and pulleys make proper contact.
Remedy if there are any problems.
(4)Abnormal noise is heard.
Check if rollers, pulleys and gears all operate smoothly.
Apply grease to the bushings and gears.
Check to see if the vibration noise of each motor is abnormally high.
Readjust the tension of the motor bracket.
1-4-9
5H1
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-4-10
5H1
1-5 Assembly and Disassembly
1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly
(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk.When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge.Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.When replacing battery on a PWB, dispose properly according to laws and regulations.
1-5-1
5H1
(2) Cleaning the paper conveying roller and reverse exit roller
Follow the procedure below to clean the paper conveying roller and reverse exit roller.
Procedure1. Remove the two screws holding the front
cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-5-1
2. Remove the two screws holding the rear cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-5-2
Front cover
Rear cover
1-5-2
5H1
3. Open the upper cover and release the front and rear stopper.
4. Release the fitting portions of the upper cover and then remove the cover.
Figure 1-5-3
5. Remove the two screws and connector and then remove the paper conveying guide unit.
6. Clean the paper conveying roller and reverse exit roller.
Figure 1-5-4
Stopper Stopper
Upper cover
Fitting portion
Fitting portion
Connector
Paper conveying
guide unit
1-5-3
5H1
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-5-4
5H1
2-1 Mechanical construction
2-1-1 Mechanical construction
(1) Reverse section
The reverse section consists of the components shown in Fig. 2-1-1 and conveys paper that is fed from the machine into the finisher to the reverse unit or the processing section. Feedshift to the reverse unit or the processing section is erformed with the flapper that is activated by the flapper solenoid (FSOL).In the reverse mode, paper that is fed into the finisher is temporarily fed to the reverse unit, is reversed, and then is con-veyed to the processing section with the rotation of the reverse roller and reverse exit roller.
Figure 2-1-1 Reverse section
(1) Paper entry sensor 1 (PES1)(2) Paper entry sensor 2 (PES2)(3) Flapper(4) Flapper(5) Reverse roller
(6) Reverse pulley(7) Separate solenoid (SSOL)(8) Reverse sensor (REVS)(9) Reverse exit roller(10) Paper conveying pulley
2-1-1
5H1
Figure 2-1-2 Reverse section block diagram
CNJJ.NO
CNJJ.CM
CNJJ.NC
BE
BECNHH. 1
CNHH. 2
PES2
+5V
BK
BKCNGG. 1
CNGG. 2
PES1
+5V
BK
BK
CN00. 1
CN00. 2
CN00. 3
CN00. 4
CNPP. 6
CNPP. 5
CNPP. 4
CNPP. 3
+24V
+24V
CNCC. 1
CNCC. 2
CNDD. 2
CNDD. 1
SSOL
+24V
CNAA. 1
CNAA. 2
CNBB. 2
CNBB. 1
FSOL
+24V
RM A
RM_A
CN00. 5
CN00. 6
CNPP. 2
CNPP. 1
RM B
RM_B
BE
BE
BE
BECNKK. 1
CNKK. 2
CNLL. 2
CNLL. 1
PES2
PES1
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BK
WE
RD
YW
BE
OE
BE
BE
BE
CN14. 1
CN14. 2
CN14. 3
CN14. 4
CN14. 5
CN14. 6
CN14. 8
+5V
PES1
+5V
PES2
+5V
SGND
N.C.
CN14. 7 REVSBE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BK
BK
CN15. 6
CN15. 5
CN15. 4
CN15. 3
CN15. 2
CN15. 1
RM A
RM_A
RM B
RM_B
+24V
+24VBE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN13. 1
CN13. 2
CN13. 3
CN13. 4
CN13. 5
CN13. 6
DC+24V
JSW
J_PTH
RC_PTH
DC+24V
RCSWYW
RD
BE
BE
YW
RD
RD
YW
BE
CN12. 4
CN12. 3
CN12. 2
CN12. 1
+24V
SSOL
+24V
FSOLBE
BE
BK
BK
FSOL
SSOL
REVS
PES2
PES1
RM
RCSW
JSW
Reverse unitFMPWB
CNJJ.NO
CNJJ.CM
CNJJ.NC
RD
YW
BE
BE
BE
BE
CNFF. 1
CNFF. 2
CNFF. 3
REVS
SGND
+5 V
2-1-2
5H1
Operation without reversing1. When the operation start signal is received, the flapper solenoid (FSOL) is turned on to open the non-reverse
path.2. After the machine exit signal is received, the reverse motor (RM) is turned on at the machine exit speed.3. When the leading edge of paper arrives at the paper entry sensor (PES), the paper conveying motor (PCM) is
turned on at the machine exit speed.4. The reverse exit roller that is rotated by the drive of the reverse motor (RM) conveys paper to the processing sec-
tion.
Figure 2-1-3 Operation without reversing
PES2
PES1
Reverse exit
roller
Paper path
FSOL:ON
Flappar
2-1-3
5H1
Operation with reversing
1. When the operation start signal is received, the flapper solenoid (FSOL) is turned off to open the reverse path.
2. After the machine exit signal is received, the reverse motor (RM) is turned on at the machine exit speed.
Figure 2-1-4
3. When the leading edge of paper arrives at the paper entry sensor (PES), if the sepa-rate solenoid (SSOL) is in the suction state, the paper is separated. If the paper convey-ing motor (PCM) stops, the motor is turned on at the machine exit speed.
Figure 2-1-5
PES2
PES1
Paper path
FSOL:OFF
Flappar
SSOL:ON
Reverse
roller
Reverse
pulley
Paper path
PES2
PES1
2-1-4
5H1
4. Suction of the separate solenoid (SSOL) is activated just before the trailing edge of paper passes through the machine exit roller.
5. When the trailing edge of paper passed through the machine exit roller, the reverse motor (RM) is accelerated to pull the paper out.
Figure 2-1-6
6. After the paper stops at the reverse position, the reverse motor (RM) is rotated in the reverse direction to convey the paper to the processing section.
7. After the leading edge of paper arrives at the reverse sensor (REVS), the separate sole-noid (SSOL) is separated to receive the next paper.
Figure 2-1-7
SSOL:OFF
Reverse
roller
Paper path
Reverse
pulley
SSOL:OFF
REVS
Reverse
roller
Reverse exit
roller
Paper path
2-1-5
5H1
(2) Processing section
The processing section consists of the components shown in Fig. 2-1-8 and discharges paper conveyed from the finisher reverse section to the exit tray. Also this section performs processing in the bundle discharge mode and the staple mode.
Figure 2-1-8 Processing section
(1) Paper conveying sensor (PCS)(2) Paper conveying roller(3) Paper conveying pulley(4) Bundle discharge unit(5) Paddle(6) Paper conveying belt(7) Processing tray
(8) Exit pulley(9) Exit roller(10) Exit sensor (EXS)(11) Adjustment home position sen-
sor (ADHPS)(12) Large gear solenoid (LGSOL)
2-1-6
5H1
Figure 2-1-9 Processing section block diagram
CN T.NCBE
RDCN T.CM
CN T.NO
BE
BE
BE
CN E. 1
CN E. 2
CN E. 3
PCS
SGND
+5V
BE
BE
BE
CN F. 1
CN F. 2
CN F. 3
ADHPS
SGND
+5V
BK
BK
BK
CN G. 1
CN G. 2
CN G. 3
CN N. 4
CN N. 3
CN N. 2
CN N. 1
CN M. 1
CN M. 2
CN M. 3
CN M. 4
ADM B
ADM_B
ADM A
ADM_A
CN R. 3
CN R. 2
CN R. 1
CN Q. 1
CN Q. 2
CN Q. 3
LGSOLLGSOL
PDSOL
ADM
PCM
EXS
ADHPS
PCS
BDUSW
+24V
N.C.
CN P. 2
CN P. 1
CN O. 1
CN O. 2
PDSOL
+24V
EXS
SGND
+5V
BKCN L. 1
CN L. 2
CN L. 3
CN L. 4
CN L. 5
CN L. 6
CN L. 7
CN L. 8
CN L. 9
CN L.1
CN L.11
PCM A
N.C.
+24V
N.C.
PCM_A
N.C
PCM B
N.C.
+24V
N.C.
PCM_B
BK
BK
WE
WE
BE
BE
BE
BE
OE
RD
YW
BE
RD
BN
YW
BE
OE
BE
BE
BE
BE
FMPWBYW
CN 3. 1
CN 3. 4
DC+24V
BDUSWBE
CN 4. 6PCS
CN 4. 4+5V
CN 4. 5SGNDBE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN 5. 1
CN 5. 2
CN 5. 3
CN 5. 7
+5V
SGND
ADHPS
N.C.
CN 5. 4+5V
CN 5. 5SGND
BK
BK
CN 5. 6EXSBK
BK
BN
YW
CN 7. 1
CN 7. 2
CN 7. 3
CN 7. 6
PCM A
PCM_A
PCM B
+24V
CN 7. 4PCM_B
CN 7. 5+24V
OE
RD
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN 8. 4
CN 8. 3
CN 8. 2
ADM B
ADM_B
ADM A
CN 8. 1ADM_ABE
BE
BECN 9. 1
CN 9. 2
CN 9. 3
+24V
PDSOL
N.C.
BK
BKCN17. 1
CN17. 2
+24V
LGSOL
2-1-7
5H1
Bundle discharge operation
1. When paper is conveyed into the processing section, the large gear solenoid (LGSOL)
Figure 2-1-10
2. Before the trailing edge of paper passes through the conveying roller, the paper con-veying motor (PCM) is decelerated to dis-charge the paper to the processing tray.
3. The paddle solenoid (PDSOL) is turned on and the paddle rotates one turn to carry the paper into the processing tray.
4. The adjustment motor (ADM) is started to adjust the paper using the adjustment plate.
Figure 2-1-11
Bundle discharge unit
LGSOL:ON
Paper path
Paddle
Processing tray
PDSOL:ON
Paper path
Paper conveying
roller
2-1-8
5H1
5. When adjustment of the last sheet of the bundle is completed, the large gear solenoid (LGSOL) is turned off to lower the bundle discharge unit.
6. The conveying belt and the exit roller rotate to discharge the bundle of paper to the exit tray.
Figure 2-1-12
Bundle discharge unit
Exit roller
LGSOL:OFF
Paper path
Paper conveying
belt
2-1-9
5H1
(3) Exit tray section
The exit tray section consists of the components shown in Fig. 2-1-13 and stocks paper discharged from the processing section using rotation of the exit roller and exit pulley.The upper limit position and the lower limit position of the exit tray are detected with the tray upper limit sensor (TULS) and the tray lower limit sensor (TLLS). Also the paper stock quantity is detected with the push paper sensor (PPS) and the sur-face view sensor (SVS).
Figure 2-1-13 Drum section
(1) Exit pulley(2) Exit roller(3) Push paper lever(4) Push paper sensor (PPS)(5) Surface view sensor (SVS)
(6) Rack(7) Rack gear(8) Tray elevation motor (TEM)(9) Tray upper limit sensor (TULS)(10) Tray lower limit sensor (TLLS)
2-1-10
5H1
Figure 2-1-14 Exit tray section block diagram
BE
BE
BE
CN X. 1
CN X. 2
CN X. 3
TULS
SGND
+5 V
BK
BK
BK
CN Y. 1
CN Y. 2
CN Y. 3
TLLS
SGND
+5 V
BE
BECN Z. 2
CN Z. 1
TEM+
TEM-
CN I. 4
CN I. 3
CN I. 2
CN I. 1
CN H. 1
CN H. 2
CN H. 3
CN H. 4
N.C.
SVSOL2
SVSOL1
+24V
PPS
SVS
SVSOL
BK
BK
BK
YW
BE
RD
BK
BK
BK
CN J. 1
CN J. 2
CN J. 3
SVS
SGND
+5V
BE
BE
BE
CN K. 1
CN K. 2
CN K. 3
PPS
SGND
+5V
CN11. 1
CN11. 2
CN11. 3
CN11. 4
CN11. 5
CN11. 6
CN11. 8
TEM+
TEM-
TLLS
SGND
+5V
TULS
+5V
CN11. 7SGNDBE
BE
BK
BK
BK
BE
BE
BE
Tray unit
TEM
TLLS
TULS
FMPWB
BK
BK
BK
CN 6. 1
CN 6. 2
CN 6. 3
CN 6. 9
+24V
SVSOL1
SVSOL2
PPS
CN 6. 4+5V
CN 6. 5SGND
BK
BK
BK
BE
BE
CN 6. 6SVS
CN 6. 7+5V
CN 6. 8SGNDBE
2-1-11
5H1
Exit tray up/down operation
1. Paper surface empty status·Sensor status Push paper sensor (PPS): OFF Surface view sensor (SVS): OFF·Exit tray control Tray elevation motor (TEM): Forward rotation. Exit tray: Moves up.This status occurs when paper is removed from the exit tray.
Figure 2-1-15 Paper surface empty status
2. Paper surface off status·Sensor status Push paper sensor (PPS): ON Surface view sensor (SVS): OFF·Exit tray control Tray elevation motor (TEM): OFF Exit tray: Does not move.If this status is detected when the exit tray is moving up or down, the tray is stopped.
Figure 2-1-16 Paper surface off status
Push paper
lever
PPS:OFF
SVS:OFF
TEM: Forward rotatioin
Push paper
lever
PPS:ON
SVS:OFF
TEM:OFF
2-1-12
5H1
3. Paper surface on status·Sensor status Push paper sensor (PPS): ON Surface view sensor (SVS): ON·Exit tray control Tray elevation motor (TEM): Reverse rotation. Exit tray: Moves down.This status occurs when paper is output onto the exit tray during copying and is accumulated.
Figure 2-1-17 Paper surface on status
4. Lever stored status·Sensor status Push paper sensor (PPS): OFF Surface view sensor (SVS): ON·Exit tray control Tray elevation motor (TEM): Reverse rotation. Exit tray: Moves down.This status occurs when paper is accumulated so much, for example at the start of copying, that the push paper lever cannot be released.
Figure 2-1-18 Lever stored status
Push paper
lever
PPS:ON
SVS:ON
TEM: Reverse rotation
Push paper
lever
PPS:OFF
SVS:ON
TEM: Reverse rotation
2-1-13
5H1
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-1-14
5H1
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout
(1) PWBs
Figure 2-2-1 PWBs
1. Finisher main PWB (FMPWB) ..................... Controls electrical components.
Machine rearMachine front Machine inside
1
2-2-1
5H1
(2) Switches and sensors
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors
1. Joint switch (JSW) ....................................... Detects the finisher attached to the machine.2. Reverse cover switch (RCSW) .................... Detects opening/closing of the reverse cover.3. Upper cover sensor (UCS)........................... Detects opening/closing of the upper cover.4. Paper entry sensor 1 (PES1) ....................... Detects paper entering the finisher (emitter).5. Paper entry sensor 2 (PES2) ....................... Detects paper entering the finisher (receiver).6. Reverse sensor (REVS)............................... Detects a paper misfeed in the reverse section.7. Paper conveying sensor (PCS).................... Detects a paper misfeed in the processing section.8. Adjustment home position sensor
(ADHPS) ...................................................... Detects the adjustment plate in the home position.9. Exit sensor (EXS)......................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the exit section.10. Bundle discharge unit switch (BDUSW)....... Power supply to the stapler section caused by descent of the bundle dis-
charge unit.11. Push paper sensor (PPS) ............................ Detects the position of the push paper lever.12. Surface view sensor (SVS) .......................... Detects the position of the push paper lever.13. Tray upper limit sensor (TULS) .................... Detects the exit tray reaching the upper limit.14. Tray lower limit sensor (TLLS) ..................... Detects the exit tray reaching the lower limit.15. Stapler cover switch (STCSW)..................... Detects opening/closing of the stapler cover.
42
7
8
15
11
12
13
14
9
310
1
56
Machine rearMachine front Machine inside
2-2-2
5H1
(3) Motors
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
1. Reverse motor (RM) .................................... Drives the reverse section.2. Paper conveying motor (PCM)..................... Drives the processing section.3. Adjustment motor (ADM) ............................. Drives the adjustment plate.4. Tray elevation motor (TEM) ......................... Raises and lowers the exit tray.
1
23
4
Machine rearMachine front Machine inside
2-2-3
5H1
(4) Solenoids
Figure 2-2-4 Solenoids
1. Separate solenoid (SSOL) ........................... Separates the reverse roller.2. Flapper solenoid (FSOL).............................. Operates the flapper.3. Large gear solenoid (LGSOL)...................... Operates the bundle discharge unit.4. Paddle solenoid (PDSOL)............................ Operates the paddle.5. Surface view solenoid (SVSOL)................... Operates the push paper lever.
1
4
5
3
2
Machine rearMachine front Machine inside
2-2-4
5H1
(5) Stapler section
Figure 2-2-5 Stapler section
1. Stapler empty sensor (STES) ...................... Detects the presence of staples.2. Stapler cartridge sensor (STCS) .................. Detects the presence of the stapler cartridge.3. Stapler home position sensor (STHPS) ....... Detects the stapler in the home position.4. Stapler self-priming sensor (STSPS) ........... Detects the pre-stapling state of the stapler.5. Stapler motor (STM)..................................... Drives the stapler.
1 2
3
45
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
2-2-5
5H1
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-2-6
5H1
2-3 Operation of the PWBs
2-3-1 Finisher main PWB
Figure 2-3-1 Finisher main PWB block diagram
JSW
RCSW
REVS
SSOL
FSOL
TULS
TLLS
PES1
PES2
RM A,B,_A,_B
TEM+,TEM-
Machine
Reverse unit
FMPWB
Tray unit
SDO
SDI
Stapler
STCSW
BDUSW
UCS
PCS
ADHPS
EXS
SVSOL
DET
STCSW
BDUSW
UCS
PCS
ADHPS
EXS
SVS
PPS
SVS
PPS
SVSOL
PDSOL
ADM A,B,_A,_B
PCM A,B,_A,_B
PDSOL
LGSOLLGSOL
ADM
PCM
Reset
DO,DI,CS,SK
CLK,DI,LD,AO1-5
JSW
PES1
PES2
REVS
SSOL
RCSW
FSOL
RM
TULS
TLLS
TEM
IC13.3
IC12.4,5
IC14.1
SGND
To stapler
ResetcircuitIC3
EEPROM
IC4
D/Aconverter
IC5
CPU
IC1
Motor
driver
IC6
Motor
driver
IC8
SCLK
READY
IC12.6,IC15.2
IC12.3,IC12.2
IC12.1,IC15.1
IC2.1,IC2.2SELECT
Motor
driver
IC7
Motor
driver
IC9
2-3-1
5H1
Figure 2-3-2 Finisher main PWB silk-screen diagram
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionCN1 1 DC+24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
Connected to the machine
2 PGND - - Ground3 DC+5.1V I 5.1 V DC 5.1 V DC power input
CN2 1 SGND - - Ground
Connected to the machine
2 SGND - - Ground
3 SGND - - Ground
4 SGND - - Ground
5 SGND - - Ground
6 SGND - - Ground
7 DET O 5/0 V DC Finisher set signal
8 SDO I 5/0 V DC Serial communication signal reception
9 SDI O 5/0 V DC Serial communication signal transmission
10 SCLK I 5/0 V DC Serial clock
11 SELECT I 5/0 V DC Select signal from the machine
12 READY O 5/0 V DC Ready signal to the machine
CN3 1 DC+24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to STCSW/BDUSW
Connected to the sta-pler cover switch and bundle dis-charge unit switch
2 SC_SW I 24/0 V DC STCSW: On/Off
3 SC_SW I 24/0 V DC STCSW: On/Off
4 BDU_SW I 24/0 V DC BDUSW: On/Off
CN1
CN17
12
CN13CN3CN10CN9CN12
CN
7C
N6
CN
11
CN14CN8CN15 CN5CN4
CN
2
12
1
11 6 1 4
8 1 6
CN181 7
CN161 10
1 7
14 3 1
11 14 1 1 1 36
19
18
61
2-3-2
5H1
CN4 1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to UCSConnected to the upper cover sen-sor and paper con-veying sen-sor
2 SGND - - Ground3 TC_SEN I 5/0 V DC UCS: On/Off4 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PCS5 SGND - - Ground6 FEED_SEN I 5/0 V DC PCS: On/Off
CN5 1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to ADHPSConnected to the adjustment home posi-tion sensor and exit sensor
2 SGND - - Ground3 AHP_SEN I 5/0 V DC ADHPS: On/Off4 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to EXS5 SGND - - Ground6 EX_SEN I 5/0 V DC EXS: On/Off7 N.C. - - Not used
CN6 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power supply to SVSOLConnected to the sur-face view solenoid, surface view sensor and push paper sensor
2 SV_SOL_1 O 24/0 V DC SVSOL: On/Off (actuate)3 SV_SOL_2 O 24/0 V DC SVSOL: On/Off (release)4 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to SVS5 SGND - - Ground6 SV_SEN I 5/0 V DC SVS: On/Off7 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PPS8 SGND - - Ground9 PP_SEN I 5/0 V DC PPS: On/Off
CN7 1 FMOT A O 24/0 V DC PCM drive control signalConnected to the paper conveying motor
2 FMOT_A O 24/0 V DC PCM drive control signal3 FMOT B O 24/0 V DC PCM drive control signal4 FMOT_B O 24/0 V DC PCM drive control signal5 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PCM6 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PCM
CN8 1 ALM A O 24/0 V DC ADM drive control signalConnected to the adjustment motor
2 ALM_A O 24/0 V DC ADM drive control signal3 ALM_B O 24/0 V DC ADM drive control signal4 ALM B O 24/0 V DC ADM drive control signal
CN9 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to PDSOLConnected to the pad-dle solenoid
2 PD_SOL O 24/0 V DC PDSOL: On/Off3 N.C. - - Not used
CN10 1 STP_SPS I 5/0 V DC STSPS: On/OffConnected to the sta-pler
2 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to stapler3 SGND - - Ground4 STP_ULS I 5/0 V DC STLS: On/Off5 STP_HPS I 5/0 V DC STHPS: On/Off6 STP_LSS I 5/0 V DC STES: On/Off7 STP_CS I 5/0 V DC STCS: On/Off8 MTR+ O 24/0 V DC STM drive control signal9 MTR+ O 24/0 V DC STM drive control signal10 MTR- O 24/0 V DC STM drive control signal11 MTR- O 24/0 V DC STM drive control signal
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
2-3-3
5H1
CN11 1 TEDM+ O 24/0 V DC TEM drive control signalConnected to the tray upper limit sensor, tray lower limit sensor and tray eleva-tion motor
2 TEDM- O 24/0 V DC TEM drive control signal3 T_NF_SEN I 5/0 V DC TLLS: On/Off4 SGND - - Ground5 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power supply to TLLS6 T_UL_SEN I 5/0 V DC TULS: On/Off7 SGND - - Ground8 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to TULS
CN12 1 F_SOL O 24/0 V DC FSOL: On/OffConnected to the sepa-rate sole-noid and flapper sole-noid
2 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to FSOL3 S_SOL O 24/0 V DC SSOL: On/Off4 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to SSOL
CN13 1 DC+24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to JSWConnected to the joint switch and reverse cover switch
2 J_SW I 24/0 V DC JSW: On/Off3 J_PTH - - Ground4 RC_PTH - - Ground5 DC+24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to RCSW6 RC_SW I 24/0 V DC RCSW: On/Off
CN14 1 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PES1Connected to the paper entry sen-sor 1, 2 and reverse sen-sor
2 IN_SEN_H I 5/0 V DC PES1: On/Off3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to PES24 IN_SEN_J I 5/0 V DC PES2: On/Off5 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to REVS6 SGND - - Ground7 RVS_SEN I 5/0 V DC REVS: On/Off8 N.C. - - Not used
CN15 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power supply to RMConnected to the reverse motor
2 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power supply to RM3 RMOT_B O 24/0 V DC RM drive control signal4 RMOT B O 24/0 V DC RM drive control signal5 RMOT_A O 24/0 V DC RM drive control signal6 RMOT A O 24/0 V DC RM drive control signal
CN16 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power to LGSOLConnected to the large gear sole-noid
2 LG_SOL O 24/0 V DC LGSOL: On/Off
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
2-3-4
5H1
2-4 A
ppen
dixe
s
Tim
ing
char
t No.
1 O
pera
tion
with
out r
ever
sing
, A4/
11"
x 8
1/2"
cop
y pa
per i
n th
e st
raig
ht m
ode
0
ES
W (
ma
ch
ine
)
Pa
pe
r e
ntr
y s
en
so
r
Re
ve
rse
se
nso
r
Re
ve
rse
exit
rolle
r
Pa
pe
r co
nve
yin
g
se
nso
r
Exit s
on
so
r
Fla
pp
er
so
len
oid
Sp
ara
te s
ole
no
id
Re
ve
rse
mo
tor
Pa
pe
r co
nve
yin
g
mo
tor
Ad
justin
g m
oto
r
Pa
dd
le s
ole
no
id
La
rge
ge
ar
so
len
oid
Sta
ple
r
Pa
pe
r
co
nve
yin
g r
olle
r
ON
11
76
.47
ms
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
60
0m
m/s
40
0m
m/s
23
0m
m/s
17
8m
m/s
0m
m/s
40
0m
m/s
60
0m
m/s
45
0m
m/s
40
0m
m/s
23
0m
m/s
20
0m
m/s
17
8m
m/s
17
6m
m/s
12
0m
m/s
0m
m/s
28
0m
m/s
20
0m
m/s
15
0m
m/s
0m
m/s
20
0m
m/s
28
0m
m/s
Pa
pe
r fo
un
d
No
pa
pe
r
Pa
pe
r fo
un
d
No
pa
pe
r
50
01
00
01
50
02
00
02
50
03
00
03
50
04
00
04
50
05
00
05
50
06
00
06
50
0(m
se
c)
2-4-1
5H1
Timin
g ch
art N
o.2
Ope
ratio
n w
ith re
vers
ing,
A4/
11"
x 8
1/2"
cop
y pa
per i
n th
e sh
ift m
ode
011
76
.47
ms
50
01
00
01
50
02
00
02
50
03
00
03
50
04
00
04
50
05
00
05
50
06
00
06
50
0(m
se
c)
ES
W (
ma
ch
ine
)
Pa
pe
r e
ntr
y s
en
so
r
Re
ve
rse
se
nso
r
Re
ve
rse
exit
rolle
r
Pa
pe
r co
nve
yin
g
se
nso
r
Exit s
on
so
r
Fla
pp
er
so
len
oid
Sp
ara
te s
ole
no
id
Re
ve
rse
mo
tor
Pa
pe
r co
nve
yin
g
mo
tor
Ad
justin
g m
oto
r
Pa
dd
le s
ole
no
id
La
rge
ge
ar
so
len
oid
Sta
ple
r
Pa
pe
r
co
nve
yin
g r
olle
r
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
60
0m
m/s
40
0m
m/s
23
0m
m/s
17
8m
m/s
0m
m/s
40
0m
m/s
60
0m
m/s
45
0m
m/s
40
0m
m/s
23
0m
m/s
20
0m
m/s
17
8m
m/s
17
6m
m/s
12
0m
m/s
0m
m/s
28
0m
m/s
20
0m
m/s
15
0m
m/s
0m
m/s
20
0m
m/s
28
0m
m/s
Pa
pe
r fo
un
d
No
pa
pe
r
Pa
pe
r fo
un
d
No
pa
pe
r
2-4-2
5H1
Timin
g ch
art N
o.3
Ope
ratio
n w
ith re
vers
ing,
A4/
11"
x 8
1/2"
cop
y pa
per i
n th
e st
aplin
g m
ode
02
28
0m
s
50
01
00
01
50
02
00
02
50
03
00
03
50
04
00
04
50
05
00
05
50
06
00
06
50
07
00
07
50
08
00
08
50
09
00
0(m
se
c)
ES
W (
ma
ch
ine
)
Pa
pe
r e
ntr
y s
en
so
r
Re
ve
rse
se
nso
r
Re
ve
rse
exit
rolle
r
Pa
pe
r co
nve
yin
g
se
nso
r
Exit s
on
so
r
Fla
pp
er
so
len
oid
Sp
ara
te s
ole
no
id
Re
ve
rse
mo
tor
Pa
pe
r co
nve
yin
g
mo
tor
Ad
justin
g m
oto
r
Pa
dd
le s
ole
no
id
La
rge
ge
ar
so
len
oid
Sta
ple
r
Pa
pe
r
co
nve
yin
g r
olle
r
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
ON
OF
F
60
0m
m/s
40
0m
m/s
23
0m
m/s
17
8m
m/s
0m
m/s
40
0m
m/s
60
0m
m/s
45
0m
m/s
40
0m
m/s
23
0m
m/s
20
0m
m/s
17
8m
m/s
17
6m
m/s
12
0m
m/s
0m
m/s
28
0m
m/s
20
0m
m/s
15
0m
m/s
0m
m/s
20
0m
m/s
28
0m
m/s
Pa
pe
r fo
un
d
No
pa
pe
r
Pa
pe
r fo
un
d
No
pa
pe
r
2-4-3
5H1
List of maintenance parts
Maintenance part name Part No. Alternative part No.
Fig. No.
Ref. No.Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
Push paper sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 2 2Surface view sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 2 2Upper cover sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 2 2Paper conveying sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 2 2Adjusting hone position sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 4 12Exit sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 4 12Tray upper limit sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 5 14Tray lower limit sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 5 14Reverse sensor TLP1241(C5,F) 305H080320 5H080320 6 52Exit roller ROL-R-H-OUT 5HL09370 1 41Paper conveying belt CAT-C 5HL09360 1 55Paper conveying roller ROL-R-CAT 5HL09640 1 45Paddle PDL-TH 5HL09430 1 22Front static eliminator BRUSH-TH-IN 5HL09440 1 14Rear static eliminator BRUSH-TH-OUT 5HL09470 1 69Reverse static eliminator BRSH-RV 5HL12320 6 59Push paper lever cushion CUSION-TM-YO 5HL09660 1 74
2-4-4
5H1
Periodic maintenance proceduresSection Maintenance
part/locationMethod Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Exterior Overall exterior cover Cleaning Every time Wipe with dry cloth or cloth moistened with alcohol.
Section Maintenancepart/location
Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Paper con-veying sec-tion
Push paper sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Surface view sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Upper cover sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Paper conveying sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Adjusting hone position sensor
Cleaning Every time Air brush
Exit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Tray upper limit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Tray lower limit sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Reverse sensor Cleaning Every time Air brush
Exit roller Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Paper conveying belt Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Paper conveying roller Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Paddle Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
Front static eliminator Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it.
Rear static eliminator Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it.
Reverse static eliminator
Check Every time If paper powder or dust adheres to tip of brush, remove it.
Push paper lever cushion
Cleaning Every time Wipe with cloth moistened with alcohol.
2-4-5
5H1
2-4-6
Wiring diagram
CN
S.N
C
CN
B.
1
CN
B.
2
CN
B.
3
CN
B.
4
CN
B.
5
CN
B.
6
CN
B.
7
CN
B.
8
DC
+5
V
SG
ND
T x
D
SG
ND
R x
D
SG
ND
N.C
.
CN
CT
GY
YW
RD
OE
PK
SB
BN
GY
YW
YW
CN
S.C
M
CN
S.N
O
CN
T.N
CB
E
RD
BK
BK
BK
CN
T.C
M
CN
T.N
O
CN
D.
1
CN
D.
2
CN
D.
3
UC
S
SG
ND
+5
V
CN
JJ.N
O
CN
JJ.C
M
CN
JJ.N
C
BE
BE
BE
CN
X.
1
CN
X.
2
CN
X.
3
TU
LS
SG
ND
+5
V
BK
BK
BK
CN
Y. 1
CN
Y. 2
CN
Y. 3
TL
LS
SG
ND
+5
V
BE
BE
CN
HH
. 1
CN
HH
. 2
PE
S2
+5
V
BE
BE
CN
Z.
2
CN
Z.
1
TE
M+
TE
M-
BK
BK
CN
GG
. 1
CN
GG
. 2
PE
S1
+5
V
BK
BK
BE
BE
BE
CN
E.
1
CN
E.
2
CN
E.
3
PC
S
SG
ND
+5
V
BE
BE
BE
CN
F.
1
CN
F.
2
CN
F.
3
AD
HP
S
SG
ND
+5
V
BK
BK
BK
CN
G.
1
CN
G.
2
CN
G.
3
CN
I.
4
CN
I.
3
CN
I.
2
CN
I.
1
CN
H.
1
CN
H.
2
CN
H.
3
CN
H.
4
N.C
.
SV
SO
L2
SV
SO
L1
+2
4V
CN
00
. 1
CN
00
. 2
CN
00
. 3
CN
00
. 4
CN
PP.
6
CN
PP.
5
CN
PP.
4
CN
PP.
3
+2
4V
+2
4V
CN
CC
. 1
CN
CC
. 2
CN
DD
. 2
CN
DD
. 1
SS
OL
+2
4V
CN
AA
. 1
CN
AA
. 2
CN
BB
. 2
CN
BB
. 1
FS
OL
+2
4V
RM
A
RM
_A
CN
00
. 5
CN
00
. 6
CN
PP.
2
CN
PP.
1
RM
B
RM
_B
CN
N.
4
CN
N.
3
CN
N.
2
CN
N.
1
CN
M.
1
CN
M.
2
CN
M.
3
CN
M.
4
AD
M B
AD
M_
B
AD
M A
AD
M_
A
CN
R.
3
CN
R.
2
CN
R.
1
CN
Q.
1
CN
Q.
2
CN
Q.
3
LG
SO
LL
GS
OL
PD
SO
L
AD
M
PC
M
PP
S
SV
S
SV
SO
L
EX
S
AD
HP
S
PC
S
UC
S
BD
US
W
ST
CS
WI/F
+2
4V
N.C
.
CN
P.
2
CN
P.
1
CN
O.
1
CN
O.
2
PD
SO
L
+2
4V
EX
S
SG
ND
+5
V
BK
BK
BK
YW BE
RD
BK
BK
BK
CN
J.
1
CN
J.
2
CN
J.
3
SV
S
SG
ND
+5
V
BE
BE
BE
BK
CN
K.
1
CN
L.
1
CN
L.
2
CN
L.
3
CN
L.
4
CN
L.
5
CN
L.
6
CN
L.
7
CN
L.
8
CN
L.
9
CN
L.1
CN
L.1
1
PC
M A
N.C
.
+2
4V
N.C
.
PC
M_
A
N.C
PC
M B
N.C
.
+2
4V
N.C
.
PC
M_
B
CN
K.
2
CN
K.
3
PP
S
SG
ND
+5
V
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN
KK
.1
CN
KK
.2
CN
LL.2
CN
LL.1
PE
S2
PE
S1
BE
BE
BK
BK
WE
WE
BE
BE
BE
BE
OE
RD
YW
BE
BE
BE
BE
BK
WE
RD
YW
BE
OE
BE
BE
BE
RD
BN
YW BE
OE
BE
BE
BE
BK
BK
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN
C.
1C
N 1
.10
CN
1.
9
CN
1.
8
CN
1.
7
CN
1.
6
CN
1.
5
CN
1.
4
CN
1.
3
CN
1.
2
CN
1.
1
DC
+2
4V
DC
+2
4V
DC
+2
4V
DC
+2
4V
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
SG
ND
DC
+5
V
CN
C.
2
CN
C.
3
CN
C.
4
CN
C.
5
CN
C.
6
CN
C.
8
CN
C.
9
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
PG
ND
DC
+2
4V
DC
+2
4V
DC
+2
4V
N.C
.
CN
A. 1
FG
ND
CN
C.
7D
C+
24
V
BE
RD
OE
PK
SB
BN
GY
GN
GN
BK
CN
10
.11
CN
10
.10
CN
10
. 9
CN
10
. 8
CN
10
. 7
CN
10
. 6
CN
10
. 4
CN
10
. 1
ST
M-
BK
T-P
CB
FR
M-T
RY
ST
M-
ST
M+
ST
M+
ST
CS
ST
ES
ST
LS
ST
SP
S
CN
10
. 5
ST
HP
S
CN
10
. 3
SG
ND
CN
10
. 2
+5
VB
E
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN
11
. 1
CN
11
. 2
CN
11
. 3
CN
11
. 4
CN
11
. 5
CN
11
. 6
CN
11
. 8
TE
M+
TE
M-
TL
LS
SG
ND
+5
V
TU
LS
+5
V
CN
11
. 7
SG
ND
BE
BE
BK
BK
BK
BE
BE
BE
CN
14
. 1
CN
14
. 2
CN
14
. 3
CN
14
. 4
CN
14
. 5
CN
14
. 6
CN
14
. 8
+5
V
PE
S1
+5
V
PE
S2
+5
V
SG
ND
N.C
.
CN
14
. 7
RE
VS
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BK
BK
CN
15
. 6
CN
15
. 5
CN
15
. 4
CN
15
. 3
CN
15
. 2
CN
15
. 1
RM
A
RM
_A
RM
B
RM
_B
+2
4V
+2
4V
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN
13
. 1
CN
13
. 2
CN
13
. 3
CN
13
. 4
CN
13
. 5
CN
13
. 6
DC
+2
4V
JS
W
J_
PT
H
RC
_P
TH
DC
+2
4V
RC
SW
YW
RD
BE
BE
YW
RD
RD
YW
BE
CN
12
. 4
CN
12
. 3
CN
12
. 2
CN
12
. 1
+2
4V
SS
OL
+2
4V
FS
OL
BE
BE
BK
BK
BK
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN
U.
1S
tap
ler
Tra
y u
nit
ST
MS
TC
SS
TE
SS
TH
PS
ST
LS
ST
SP
S
CN
U.
2
CN
U.
3
CN
U.
4
CN
U.
5
CN
U.
6
CN
U.
7
CN
U.
8
CN
U.
9
CN
U.1
3
ST
M-
TE
M
TL
LS
TU
LS
FS
OL
SS
OL
RE
VS
PE
S2
PE
S1
RM
RC
SW
JS
W
Re
ve
rse
un
it
FM
PW
B
ST
M-
N.C
.
ST
M+
ST
M+
N.C
.
ST
CS
ST
ES
ST
HP
S
ST
SP
S
CN
U.1
0S
TL
S
CN
U.1
1S
GN
D
CN
U.1
2+
5V
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
WE
/BK
WE
WE
/RD
VT
GN
WE
/BK
WE
WE
/RD
GN
CN
2.
5
CN
2.
4
CN
2.
3
CN
2.
2
CN
2.
1
T x
D
SG
ND
R x
D
SG
ND
CN
CT
VT
YW
GY
RD
CN
3.
1
CN
3.
2
CN
3.
3
CN
3.
4
DC
+2
4V
ST
CS
W
ST
CS
W
BD
US
WB
E
BK
BK
BK
CN
4.
1
CN
4.
2
CN
4.
3
CN
4.
6
+5
V
SG
ND
UC
S
PC
S
CN
4.
4+
5V
CN
4.
5S
GN
DB
E
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN
5.
1
CN
5.
2
CN
5.
3
CN
5.
7
+5
V
SG
ND
AD
HP
S
N.C
.
CN
5.
4+
5V
CN
5.
5S
GN
D
BK
BK
CN
5.
6E
XS
BK
BK
BN
YW
CN
7.
1
CN
7.
2
CN
7.
3
CN
7.
6
PC
M A
PC
M_
A
PC
M B
+2
4V
CN
7.
4P
CM
_B
CN
7.
5+
24
V
OE
RD
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN
8.
4
CN
8.
3
CN
8.
2
AD
M B
AD
M_
B
AD
M A
CN
8.
1A
DM
_A
BE
BE
BE
CN
9.
1
CN
9.
2
CN
9.
3
+2
4V
PD
SO
L
N.C
.
BK
BK
CN
17
. 1
CN
17
. 2
+2
4V
LG
SO
L
BK
BK
BK
CN
6.
1
CN
6.
2
CN
6.
3
CN
6.
9
BK
T-B
AS
E
BK
T-B
AS
E
BK
T-S
OL
BK
T-P
CM
BE
BE
BK
T-S
TS
TY
-RV
-D
+2
4V
SV
SO
L1
SV
SO
L2
PP
S
CN
6.
4+
5V
CN
6.
5S
GN
D
BK
BK
BK
BE
BE
CN
6.
6S
VS
CN
6.
7+
5V
CN
6.
8S
GN
DB
E
CN
JJ.N
O
CN
JJ.C
M
CN
JJ.N
C
RD
PK
: P
INK
BN
: B
RO
WN
BE
: B
LU
E
BK
: B
LA
CK
GN
: G
RE
EN
GY
: G
RA
Y
RD
: R
ED
WE
: W
HIT
E
YW
: Y
EL
LO
W
OE
: O
RA
NG
E
VT:
VIO
LE
T
SB
: S
KY
BL
UE
YW
BE
BE
BE
BE
CN
FF.
1
CN
FF.
2
CN
FF.
3
RE
VS
SG
ND
+5
V
FaxSystem(N)
3KK
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-11-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-4
(1) Main body..........................................................................................................................................1-1-4(2) Operation panel.................................................................................................................................1-1-5
1-1-3 Mechanical construction .........................................................................................................................1-1-6
1-2 Installation1-2-1 Installation environment ..........................................................................................................................1-2-11-2-2 Unpacking and installation ......................................................................................................................1-2-2
(1) Installation procedure ........................................................................................................................1-2-2(2) Remove the tapes and pad ...............................................................................................................1-2-3
1-3 Maintenance Mode1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1
(1) Maintenance mode item list...............................................................................................................1-3-1(2) Contents of maintenance mode items...............................................................................................1-3-4
1-3-2 System settings.....................................................................................................................................1-3-39(1) Executing a system setting item......................................................................................................1-3-39(2) Fax default.......................................................................................................................................1-3-40(3) Registration .....................................................................................................................................1-3-42
1-4 Error Codes1-4-1 Error codes .............................................................................................................................................1-4-1
(1) Error code..........................................................................................................................................1-4-1(2) Table of general classification ...........................................................................................................1-4-2
(2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B .........................................................................1-4-4 (2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit .....................................................................1-4-5 (2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error...................................................................1-4-5 (2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error ........................................................................1-4-5 (2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission...............................................................................1-4-6 (2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception ....................................................................................1-4-8 (2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission ..........................................................................1-4-10 (2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception................................................................................1-4-10 (2-9) U023XX error code table: Relay command abnormal reception .............................................1-4-10
(2-10) U044XX error code table: Encrypted transmission .................................................................1-4-10
1-5 Troubleshooting1-5-1 Self-diagnosis .........................................................................................................................................1-5-1
(1) Self-diagnostic function .....................................................................................................................1-5-1(2) Self diagnostic codes ........................................................................................................................1-5-1
1-5-2 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................1-5-3
2-1 Electrical Parts Layout2-1-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-1-1
2-2 Operation of the PWBs2-2-1 Fax control PWB.....................................................................................................................................2-2-12-2-2 NCU PWB ...............................................................................................................................................2-2-5
3KK
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 SpecificationsType ........................................................... Optional Fax KitCompatibility .............................................. Group 3Line Requirement ...................................... Subscription telephone lineTransmission Speed .................................. Within 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T #1 chart)Modem Speed............................................ 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/
7200/4800/2400 bpsData Compression ..................................... JBIG/MMR/MR/MHError Correction ......................................... ECMMaximum Document Dimensions .............. Width: 11" [297 mm] Length: 63" [1600 mm]Automatic Document Feeder Capacity ...... Duplex document processor: Max. 100 pagesAuxiliary Scanning Line Density ................ Horizontal x Vertical
Normal (8 dots/mm x 3.85 lines/mm)Fine (8 dots/mm x 7.7 lines/mm)Super fine (8 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)Ultra fine (16 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm)
Recording Resolution ................................ 600 dpi x 600 dpiGrayscale................................................... 128 levels (Value differential diffusion)Speed-Dial Keys ........................................ Max. 1000 destinationsBroadcast Transmission ............................ Max. 300 destinationsPolling Reception....................................... Max. 300 locationsInstalled Bitmap Memory ........................... Max. 4 MB (for reading), Max. 4 MB (for writing) (with the addition of optional
memory)Installed Imaging Memory.......................... 4 MB (Standard), 32 MB (Maximum)Management Reports and Lists ................. Activity Report, Confirmation List, User Setting List, One-Touch Key List, Tele-
phone Directory List, Program Dial List, Group Dial List, Encryption Key List, Restricted Access Report
Options ...................................................... Memory module DIMM (32 MB)Functions ................................................... See pages 1-1-2 to 1-1-3.
NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-1-1
3KK
Reception functions Manual receptionAutomatic receptionFax/telephone auto selectionTAD receptionD.R.D. reception*1Remote switching
Transmission functions One-touch dialing*2Program dialing*2Group dialing*2Chain dialing*2Redialing (manual/automatic)Dial confirmation
Communication functions Direct feed transmissionMemory transmissionDirect receptionMemory reception (subaddress-based confidential reception and relay broadcast reception)
Additional communication func-tions
Broadcast transmission (up to 300 numbers)Polling communicationEncrypted communicationPassword check communicationMemory fax forwardingReserved transmissionTimer transmissionInterrupt transmissionShort protocolECMSubaddress transmissionSubaddress-based confidential receptionSubaddress-based bulletin board communicationSubaddress-based relay broadcastSubaddress-based relay broadcast reception
Supplementary communication functions
Manual transmissionTelephone directoryCanceling communicationTransmission destination displayTone transmissionMemory back-up (60 min.*3)Communication result display
Supplementary transmission func-tions
Batch transmissionTTI transmissionBulletin boardRotation transmissionDuplex transmission*4Initial communication speed settingLine type setting
Supplementary reception func-tions
Memory reception2-in-1 receptionAuto reduce receptionRotation receptionDuplex receptionRecording paper setting (auto selection, fixed size or fixed cassette)Reception date and time recordingReduced size receptionBulk fax reception
1-1-2
3KK
*1: For 120 V specifications only.*2: To be registered under one-touch keys. Up to 1000 one-touch keys can be used for one-touch dialing, program dialing, group dialing and chain dialing.*3: When the optional memory module DIMM is installed.*4: Available only when the duplex document processor is installed.
Reports Activity reportTransmission reportReception reportPower failure reportDelayed communication reportConfirmation reportUser settings listEncryption key listManagement reportDepartment listOne-touch key listTelephone directory listProgram dial listGroup dial listSubaddress confidential box listSubaddress relay box listEncryption box listNetwork fax setting list
Others Memory editingRemote diagnosisDepartment control for faxesSmoothing receptionFax priority printoutNetwork fax functions
1-1-3
3KK
1-1-2 Parts names
(1) Main body
Figure 1-1-1
567
8
9
3
10
2
1
4
2
1. Operation panel2. Telephone jack (T)3. Line jack (L)4. Main power switch
Document Processor5. Document tray6. Document insert guides7. Document Processor cover8. Document eject table9. Document Processor open/close lever10. Document set indicator
1-1-4
3KK
(2) Operation panel
8 0
1
6
2
5
9
7
3
4
10 11
1. Touch panel2. Numeric keys3. Start key4. Fax key/Fax indicator5. Fax lamp6. Reset key7. Stop/Clear key8. Print Management key9. System Menu/Counter key10. Interrupt key/indicator lamp11. Power key
1-1-5
3KK
1-1-3 Mechanical construction
Figure 1-1-2
The fax system consists of the fax control PWB (FCPWB), NCU PWB (NCUPWB), speaker (SP), backup battery (BUBAT) and optional memory module DIMM.
LIN
E
TE
L1
YC19
YC6 YC1
YC2
YC2
21
NCUPWB
FCPWB
MPWB
OPWB-L
OPWB-R
FRYPWB
YC7
YC7
1
2
YC25
YC3
YC1
YC1
Touch panel
LCD
1
YC4
YC21234
YC5
YC4
YC3
CN1
CN2
BUBAT2
1
BTT+
GND(P)
SP
CN1
3
1
2
PSPWB
1-1-6
3KK
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment1. Installation location (Be based on the machine establishment place.)
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photo-conductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams.Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto the machine.Avoid dust and vibration.Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°).Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photo-conductor, such as mer-cury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.Select a room with good ventilation.
1-2-1
3KK
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation
(1) Installation procedure
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking
Caution: Place the machine on a level surface.
��
��
������
��
���
��
���������
1. Fax control assembly2. Cover pad3. Antistatic air-padded bag4. Harness5. Modular cord (100V, 120
V specifications)6. Plastic bag7. M4 x 8-tap-tight S screws8. Plastic bag9. FCC68 label (120 V
specifications only)10. Alphabet label
11. CD-ROM12. Installation guide13. Plastic bag14. Upper pad15. Pad16. Operation guide (120 V
specifications only)17. Plastic bag (120 V speci-
fications only) 18. Outer case19. Barcode labels
1-2-2
3KK
(2) Remove the tapes and pad
When installing the machine, be sure to remove the following tapes and pad.
1. Remove the tape and then remove the cover pad.
Figure 1-2-2
Cover pad
Tape
1-2-3
3KK
Initialization procedure after installation of facsimile system1. Insert the machine power plug to the wall
outlet and turn the main power switch on.2. Run maintenance item U601.3. Enter a destination code using the numeric
keys (refer to the destination code list) and then press the start key.Enter a destination code with three digits.
4. Enter the OEM code (000) and then press the start key.
5. Confirm that the display is changed as shown in the figure.The version number of the software is dis-played.
6. Press the cursor down key to change the display to maintenance item U602.
Figure 1-2-3
7. Press the start key and confirm that the dis-play is changed as shown in the figure.The version number of the software is dis-played.
8. After completing the installation, run a com-munications test to confirm that the fax sys-tem is working correctly.
Figure 1-2-4
Code Destination Code Destination Code Destination000 Japan 159 South Africa 253 Sweden009 Australia 169 Thailand France080 Hong Kong 181 U.S.A. Austria084 Indonesia 242 South America Switzerland088 Israel 243 Saudi Arabia Belgium108 Malaysia 253 CTR21 (European nations) Denmark126 New Zealand Italy Finland136 Peru Germany Portugal137 Philippines Spain Ireland152 Middle East U.K. Norway156 Singapore Netherlands 254 Taiwan
INI. KEEP DATA
COMPLETED:000 000
INI. KEEP DATACOMPLETED***************
INI. SHIP DATA
COMPLETED:000 000
INI. SHIP DATACOMPLETED***************
1-2-4
3KK
1-3 Maintenance Mode
1-3-1 Maintenance mode
(1) Maintenance mode item list
Section ItemNo. Content of maintenance item Initial setting*
Fax U600 Initializing all data -U601 Initializing permanent data -U602 Setting factory defaults -U603 Setting the user registration data
Setting the self telephone numberSetting the type of telephone lineSetting the number of rings in the fax/telephone auto select modeSetting remote diagnostic transmission
----
U604 Clearing dataClearing transmission historyInitializing the subaddress confidential box IDInitializes the subaddress relay box IDInitializes the encription box ID
----
U605 Setting the system (operational)Setting how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory transmissionSetting an alarm for when reception is completedSelecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be per-formedSetting the addition of an image to the reportSetting the error report display formatSetting the line-monitoring periodSetting the one-shot detection time for remote switchingSetting the continuous detection time for remote switchingSetting the initial condition of fax image scanning quality
-
--
------
U606 Setting the system (operation unit and display)Setting the conditions under which an error indicator turns offSetting the date formatSetting if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initializedSetting if the scanning density in fax mode is initializedSetting whether to skip unregistered one-touch key numbers on the list
-----
U607 Setting the system (communication 1)Setting the auto redialing intervalSetting the communication starting speedSetting the reception speedSetting the mode for remote switchingSetting the transmission intervalsSetting the loop current detection before dialingSetting the DIS signal to 4 bytes
-------
U608 Setting transmissionSetting the method to process errorsSetting the number of times of DIS signal receptionSetting the reference for RTN signal outputSetting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the senderSetting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiverSetting ECM transmissionSetting ECM receptionSetting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1Setting the frequency of the CED signal
---------
*Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
1-3-1
3KK
Fax U609 Setting communication timeSetting the T0 time-out timeSetting the T1 time-out timeSetting the T2 time-out timeSetting the Ta time-out timeSetting the Tb1 time-out timeSetting the Tb2 time-out timeSetting the Tc time-out timeSetting the Td time-out time
--
6930208060-
U610 Setting the modem output levelSetting the modem output levelAdjusting the modem output level
--
U611 G3 cable equalizerSetting the G3 transmission cable equalizerSetting the G3 reception cable equalizer
--
U612 Setting the modem detection level -U613 Setting the DTMF output level
Setting the DTMF (high-frequency group) output levelSetting the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level
--
U614 Adjusting the DTMF output levelAdjusting the DTMF (high-frequency group) output levelAdjusting the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level
--
U615 Setting the NCUSetting the connection to PBX/PSTNSetting PSTN dial tone detectionSetting busy tone detectionSetting for a PBX
----
U616 Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial pulsesMake time in the pulse cycle (10 PPS)Make time in the pulse cycle (20 PPS)
--
U617 Outputting listsSettings listAction listOwn-status reportProtocol listOne-touch dialing ECM setting list
-----
U650 Setting the system 1Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnificationSetting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction modeSetting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction modeSetting the recording width for inch specificationsSetting the automatic printing of the protocol list
3
0
0
--
U651 Setting the system 2Setting the variations range in rotation receptionSetting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reductionSetting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is setSetting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set
37
22
26
Section ItemNo. Content of maintenance item Initial setting*
*Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
1-3-2
3KK
Fax U660 Setting the system (communication 2)Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2Setting the short protocol transmissionSetting the reception of a short protocol transmissionSetting the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select modeSetting ECM for each one-touch key
----
-
U670 Setting the system (communication 3)Enabling/disabling V.34 communicationSetting the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz)Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3200 Hz)Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3000 Hz)Setting the V.34 symbol speed (2800 Hz)
-----
U680 Displaying the fax board ROM version -U882 Setting the software switches -U894 Performing board test
Performing test on DRAMPerforming test on optional memory
--
Others U917 Setting backup data reading/writing -U926 Rewriting FAX program -
Section ItemNo. Content of maintenance item Initial setting*
*Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
1-3-3
3KK
(2) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenanceitem No. Description
U600 Initializing all dataDescriptionInitializes software switches and all data in the backup data on the fax control PWB, according to the destina-tion and OEM.Executes the check of the file system, when abnormality of the file system is detected, initializes the file sys-tem, communication past record and register setting contents.PurposeTo initialize the fax control PWB.Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for entering the destination code is displayed.Enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the destination code list on page 1-3-5 for the destination code).
2. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is displayed.There is no operation necessary on this screen.
3. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop/clear key.4. After data initialization, the entered destination and OEM codes are displayed, and the ROM version is
displayed two seconds later.
Destination code list
INI. ALL DATA
COUNTRY CODE:000
INI. ALL DATA
OEM CODE:000
INI. ALL DATA
COMPLETED:000 000
INI. ALL DATACOMPLETED***************
Code Destination Code Destination Code Destination000 Japan 159 South Africa 253 Sweden009 Australia 169 Thailand France080 Hong Kong 181 U.S.A. Austria084 Indonesia 242 South America Switzerland088 Israel 243 Saudi Arabia Belgium108 Malaysia 253 CTR21 (European nations) Denmark126 New Zealand Italy Finland136 Peru Germany Portugal137 Philippines Spain Ireland152 Middle East U.K. Norway156 Singapore Netherlands 254 Taiwan
1-3-4
3KK
U601 Initializing permanent dataDescriptionInitializes software switches other than that for machine data on the fax control PWB according to the destina-tion and OEM.PurposeTo initialize the fax control PWB without changing user registration data and factory settings.Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for entering the destination code is displayed.Enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the destination code list on page 1-3-5 for the destination code).
2. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is displayed.There is no operation necessary on this screen.
3. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop/clear key.4. After data initialization, the entered destination and OEM codes are displayed, and the ROM version is
displayed two seconds later.
U602 Setting factory defaultsDescriptionInitializes software switches other than that for machine data and the backup data on the fax control PWB, according to the destination and OEM.PurposeTo initialize the fax control PWB to the factory default.Method
1. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop/clear key.2. After data initialization, the entered destination and OEM codes are displayed, and the ROM version is
displayed two seconds later.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
INI. KEEP DATA
COUNTRY CODE:000
INI. KEEP DATA
OEM CODE:000
INI. KEEP DATA
COMPLETED:000 000
INI. KEEP DATACOMPLETED***************
INI. SHIP DATA
COMPLETED:000 000
INI. SHIP DATACOMPLETED***************
1-3-5
3KK
U603 Setting the user registration dataDescriptionMakes user settings to enable the use of the machine as a fax.PurposeTo be run after installation of the facsimile kit if necessary.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the self telephone number1. Enter the telephone number using the numeric keys.
Up to 20 digits can be entered.To correct the entered telephone number or to delete the stored telephone number, reset by pressing the stop/clear key.
2. Press the start key.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
The item-selection screen does not reappear until registration or deletion processing is completed.Setting the type of telephone line
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the number of rings in the fax/telephone auto select modeUse this if the user wishes to adjust the number of rings that occur before the unit switches into fax receiving mode when fax/telephone auto-select is enabled.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
If you set this to 0, the unit will start fax reception without any ringing.2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting remote diagnostic transmission1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to select if remote diagnostic transmission is to be enabled.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionSELF TEL NO. Sets the self telephone number.LINE TYPE Sets the type of telephone line.RINGS (F/T) # Sets the number of rings in fax/telephone auto select mode.REMOTE DIAG Sets remote diagnostic transmission.
Display Description1:DTMF DTMF2:10 10 PPS3:20 20 PPS
Description Setting rangeNumber of fax/telephone rings 0 to 15
Display Description1: ON Remote diagnostic transmission is enabled.2: OFF Remote diagnostic transmission is disabled.
1-3-6
3KK
U604 Clearing dataDescriptionInitializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history and IDs.PurposeTo clear the transmission history or if an ID has been forgotten.Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be initialized.
Initialization processing starts. When processing is finished, the screen displays [COMPLETED].
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U605 Setting the system (operational)DescriptionMakes settings for fax transmission regarding operation.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory transmissionTo select whether to send only stored data or to display an error indication and cancel transmission if memory becomes full during memory transmission.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionCOMM. REC Clears the activity report, error list, action list, transmission history of
each department as listed on the department control report, transmis-sion history for displaying the transmission results, document num-ber, timer program information, protocol list, and other transmission history such as image data, excluding items regarding the machine variation adjustment.
F-CONFI ID Initializes the subaddress confidential box ID.F-RELY ID Initializes the subaddress relay box ID.ENCRPT ID Initializes the encription box ID.
Display DescriptionMEM. FULL Sets how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory trans-
mission.FIN. ALARM Sets an alarm for when reception is completed.AUTO REDU Selects if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed.ADD IMAGE Sets for the addition of an image to the report.ERR. CODE Sets the error report display format.MONITOR Sets the line-monitoring period.TIME (ONE) Sets the one-shot detection time for remote switching.TIME (CON) Sets the continuous detection time for remote switching.RESOLUT Sets the initial condition of fax image scanning quality.
Display Description1: CONT Whether to continue memory transmission or to clear the memory can
be selected by the user.2: STOP Memory is forcibly cleared.
1-3-7
3KK
U605 Setting an alarm for when reception is completed1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performedSets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the auxiliary direction or at 100% magnification.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the addition of an image to the reportSelects if an image is to be added to the transmission report.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the error report display formatSelects the format of the transmission report when a transmission error occurs.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the line-monitoring periodSets the period to monitor the line. By monitoring a transmission from the start to the end, it can be checked whether the transmission was correct or not.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the one-shot detection time for remote switchingSets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will be dis-played, but the setting made is ineffective.)
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display Description1: ON An alarm rings.2: OFF An alarm does not ring.
Display Description1: ON Auto reduction is performed if the received document is longer than the fax paper.2: OFF Auto reduction is not performed.
Display Description1: ON Image added.2: OFF Image not added.
Display Description1: WORDS Records an error message (BUSY, OK, ERROR or STOP).2: CODE Records a six-digit error code.3: MIX Records either an error message or code.
Display Description1: END Until transmission is completed.2: DIS After dialing is completed until reception of a DIS signal.
Description Setting rangeOne-shot detection time for remote switching 0 to 255 (x 5 : ms)
1-3-8
3KK
U605 Setting the continuous detection time for remote switchingSets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will be displayed, but the setting made is ineffective.)
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the initial condition of fax image scanning qualitySet to the resolution that is most frequently used by the user.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U606 Setting the system (operation unit and display)DescriptionMakes settings for fax transmission regarding the operation unit and display.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the conditions under which an error indicator turns off1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Description Setting rangeContinuous detection time for remote switching 0 to 255 (x 5 : ms)
Display Description1: S Standard2: F Fine3: SF Super fine4: UF Ultra fine
Display DescriptionALARM LED OFF Sets the conditions under which an error indicator turns off.DATE PATTERN Sets the date format.RESO. LOCK Sets if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized.DENS. LOCK Sets if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized.REPORT SKIP Sets whether to skip unregistered one-touch key numbers on the list.
Display Description1: RESET An error indicator turns off only when the reset key is pressed.2: COMM An error indicator turns off when any key is pressed, an original is
inserted or the next transmission is started.
1-3-9
3KK
U606(cont.)
Setting the date formatSelects the date format on the respective reports and sender's information record.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initializedSets if the resolution is to be initialized when fax operation is complete.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting if the scanning density in fax mode is initializedSets if the scanning density is initialized when fax operation is complete.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting whether to skip unregistered one-touch key numbers on the listSets whether to skip unregistered one-touch key numbers on the list.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display Description1: YMD Year/month/day2: MDY Month/day/year3: DMY Day/month/year
Display Description1: ON Resolution is initialized.2: OFF Resolution is not initialized.
Display Description1: ON Density is initialized.2: OFF Density is not initialized.
Display Description1: ON Unregistered numbers are skipped.2: OFF Unregistered numbers are not skipped.
1-3-10
3KK
U607 Setting the system (communication 1)DescriptionMakes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the auto redialing intervalChange the setting to prevent the following problems: fax transmission is not possible due to too short redial interval, or fax transmission takes too much time to complete due to too long redial interval.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the communication starting speedSets the initial communication speed when starting transmission. When the destination unit has V.34 capabil-ity, V.34 is selected for transmission, regardless of this setting.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the reception speedSets the reception speed that the sender is informed of using the DIS or NSF signal. When the destination unit has V.34 capability, V.34 is selected, regardless of the setting.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionINTERVAL Sets the auto redialing interval.TX SPEED Sets the communication starting speed.RX SPEED Sets the reception speed.REMOTE Sets the mode for remote switching.CALL INT Sets the transmission intervals.DC LOOP Sets the loop current detection before dialing.DIS 4BYTE Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Description Setting rangeRedialing interval 1 to 9 (min.)
Display Description1: 144 V.17, 14400 bps2: 96 V.17, 9600 bps3: 48 V.27ter, 4800 bps4: 24 V.27ter, 2400 bps
Display Description1: 144 V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter2: 96 V.29, V.27ter3: 48 V.27ter4: 24 V.27ter (fallback only)
1-3-11
3KK
U607(cont.)
Setting the mode for remote switchingSets the signal detection method for remote switching. Be sure to change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the machine.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the transmission intervalsSets the minimum time required for connection to the line for the next transmission after the previous trans-mission was completed. Change the setting if transmission problems occur during multi-transmission, such as broadcasting and polling transmission, or reserved transmission.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The value is set.
3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.Setting the loop current detection before dialingSets if the loop current detection is performed before dialing.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the DIS signal to 4 bytesSets if bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display Description1: ONE One-shot detection2: CONT Continuous detection
Display Description1: 10 10 s2: 30 30 s3: 70 70 s4: 120 120 s
Display Description1: ON Performs loop current detection before dialing.2: OFF Does not perform loop current detection before dialing.
Display Description1: ON Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.2: OFF Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.
1-3-12
3KK
U608 Setting transmissionDescriptionMakes settings regarding fax transmission.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the method to process errorsSelects if transmission is to be treated as an error if an RTN or PIN signal is received. If it is treated as an error, an alarm sounds and a transmission report is output.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the number of times of DIS signal receptionSets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Used as one of the correction measures for transmission errors and other problems.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the reference for RTN signal outputSets the error line rate as the reference for RTN signal output. If transmission errors occur frequently due to the quality of the line, they can be reduced by lowering this setting.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionERROR Sets the method to process errors.DIS-2 RES Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.RTN CHECK Sets the reference for RTN signal output.TX ECHO Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.RX ECHO Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver.ECM TX Sets ECM transmission.ECM RX Sets ECM reception.TCF CHECK Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1.CED FREQ. Sets the frequency of the CED signal.
Display Description1: OK Transmission is not treated as an error.2: ERROR Transmission is treated as an error.
Display Description1: ONCE Responds to the first signal.2: TWICE Responds to the second signal.
Display Description1: 5 Error line rate of 5%2: 10 Error line rate of 10%3: 15 Error line rate of 15%4: 20 Error line rate of 20%
1-3-13
3KK
U608(cont.)
Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the senderSets the period before a DCS signal is sent after a DIS signal is received. Used when problems occur due to echoes at the sender.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiverSets the period before an NSF, CSI or DIS signal is sent after a CED signal is received. Used when problems occur due to echoes at the receiver.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting ECM transmissionTo be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting ECM receptionTo be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Used as a measure to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display Description1: 500 Sends a DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.2: 300 Sends a DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
Display Description1: 500 Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 500 ms after receiving a CED.2: 75 Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 75 ms after receiving a CED.
Display Description1: ON ECM transmission is enabled.2: OFF ECM transmission is disabled.
Display Description1: ON ECM reception is enabled.2: OFF ECM reception is disabled.
Description Setting rangeNumber of allowed error bytes when detecting TCF 0 to 255
1-3-14
3KK
U608(cont.)
Setting the frequency of the CED signalSets the frequency of the CED signal. Used as one of the measures to improve transmission performance for international communications.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the frequency.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U609 Setting communication timeDescriptionSets the time-out time for fax transmission.PurposeUsed mainly to improve transmission performance for international communications.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the T0 time-out timeSets the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent.Depending on the quality of the exchange, or when the auto select function is selected at the destination unit, a line can be disconnected. Change the setting to prevent this problem.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the T1 time-out timeSets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception. No change is necessary for this mainte-nance item.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display Description1: 2100 2100 Hz2: 1100 1100 Hz
Display DescriptionT0 Sets the T0 time-out time.T1 Sets the T1 time-out time.T2 Sets the T2 time-out time.Ta Sets the Ta time-out time.Tb1 Sets the Tb1 time-out time.Tb2 Sets the Tb2 time-out time.Tc Sets the Tc time-out time.Td Sets the Td time-out time.
Description Setting rangeT0 time-out time 30 to 90 s
Description Setting rangeT1 time-out time 30 to 90 s
1-3-15
3KK
U609(cont.)
Setting the T2 time-out timeThe T2 time-out time decides the following.From CFR signal output to image data receptionFrom image data reception to the next signal receptionIn ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the Ta time-out timeIn the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to continue ringing an operator through the connected telephone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). A fax signal is received within the Ta set time, or the fax mode is selected automatically when the time elapses. In fax/telephone auto select mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Figure 1-3-1 Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out timeSetting the Tb1 time-out timeIn the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In fax/telephone auto select mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the Tb2 time-out timeIn the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start ringing an operator through the connected tele-phone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In the fax/telephone auto select mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Description Setting range Default setting Change in value per stepT2 time-out time 1 to 255 69 100 ms
Description Setting range Change in value per stepTa time-out time 1 to 255 30
Ta
Tb2
Tb1Rin
g d
ete
ctio
n
Lin
e c
on
ne
ctio
n
as a
fa
x m
ach
ine
Rin
gs
Rin
g b
ack t
on
e s
en
d s
tart
Sta
rt o
f fa
x r
ece
ptio
n
Description Setting range Default setting Change in value per stepTb1 time-out time 1 to 255 20 100 ms
Description Setting range Default setting Change in value per stepTb2 time-out time 1 to 255 80 100 ms
1-3-16
3KK
U609(cont.)
Setting the Tc time-out timeIn the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to fax reception after a connected telephone receives a call. Only the telephone function is available if shifting is not made within the set Tc time.In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the Td time-out timeSets the length of the time required to determine silent status (fax), one of the triggers for Tc time check. In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. Be sure not to set it too short; otherwise, the mode may be shifted to fax while the unit is being used as a tele-phone.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Description Setting range Change in value per stepTc time-out time 1 to 255 s 60
Description Setting rangeTd time-out time 1 to 255 s
1-3-17
3KK
U610 Setting the modem output levelDescriptionSets the modem output level.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the modem output levelTo be set when installing the machine in order to adapt to the line characteristics.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Adjusting the modem output levelNo change is necessary from the factory default.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionSGL LEVEL MODEM Sets the modem output level.SGL OUTPUT ADJ Adjusts the modem output level.
Description Setting rangeModem output level 0 to 15
Setting Output level12 1.0 dBm11 0.75 dBm10 0.5 dBm9 0.25 dBm8 0 dBm7 -0.25 dBm6 -0.5 dBm5 -0.75 dBm4 -1.0 dBm
1-3-18
3KK
U611 G3 cable equalizerDescriptionSets the G3 cable equalizer.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizerPerform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the G3 reception cable equalizerPerform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U612 Setting the modem detection levelDescriptionSets the modem detection level.PurposeTo improve the transmission performance when a low quality line is used.MethodPress the start key. The current setting is displayed.Setting
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionREG. G3 TX EQR Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.REG. G3 RX EQR Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.
Display Description1: 0 0 km2: 18 1.8 km3: 36 3.6 km4: 72 7.2 km
Display Description1: 0 0 km2: 18 1.8 km3: 36 3.6 km4: 72 7.2 km
Display Description1: 33 -33 dBm2: 38 -38 dBm3: 43 -43 dBm4: 47 -47 dBm
1-3-19
3KK
U613 Setting the DTMF output levelDescriptionSets the DTMF output level of a push-button dial telephone.PurposeUsed if problems occur when sending a signal with a push-button dial telephone.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
E.g.: When set to 8, the DTMF output level is -8 dBm.2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionDTMF TX LEVEL (H) Sets the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level.DTMF TX LEVEL (L) Sets the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level.
Description Setting rangeDTMF (high-/low-frequency group) output level 0 to 255
1-3-20
3KK
U614 Adjusting the DTMF output levelDescriptionAdjusts the DTMF output level of a push-button dial telephone.PurposeNo change is necessary from the factory default.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionSGL LVL DTMF (H) Adjusts the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level.SGL LVL DTMF (L) Adjusts the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level.
Setting DTMF (high-/low-frequency group) output level12 2.0 dBm11 1.5 dBm10 1.0 dBm9 0.5 dBm8 0 dBm7 -0.5 dBm6 -1.0 dBm5 -1.5 dBm4 -2.0 dBm
1-3-21
3KK
U615 Setting the NCUDescriptionMakes setting regarding the network control unit (NCU).PurposeTo be set when installing the facsimile kit.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the connection to PBX/PSTNSelects if a fax is to be connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting PSTN dial tone detectionSelects if the dial tone is detected to check the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to a public switched telephone network.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting busy tone detectionWhen a fax signal is sent, sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone is not detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time.Fax transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When set to 2, this problem may be prevented.However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionEXCHANGE Sets the connection to PBX/PSTN.DIAL TONE Sets PSTN dial tone detection.BUSY TONE Sets busy tone detection.PBX SETTING Setting for a PBX.
Display Description1: PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.2: PBX Connected to a PBX.
Display Description1: ON Detects the dial tone.2: OFF Does not detect the dial tone.
Display Description1: ON Detects busy tone.2: OFF Does not detect busy tone.
1-3-22
3KK
U615 Setting for a PBXSelects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U616 Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial pulsesDescriptionAdjusts the ratio of make-to-break (ratio of make in pulse cycles) of dial pulses.PurposeChange the setting if dial pulse transmission problems occur. Note that 20 PPS is for Japanese specifications only and no setting is necessary for other specifications.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display Description1: EARTH Earth mode2: FLS Flashing mode3: LOOP Code number mode
Display DescriptionMAKE TIME (10 PPS) Make time (10 PPS)MAKE TIME (20 PPS) Make time (20 PPS)
Description Setting rangeMake time in the pulse cycle (10 PPS) 1 to 99 (ms)Make time in the pulse cycle (20 PPS) 1 to 49 (ms)
1-3-23
3KK
U617 Outputting listsDescriptionOutputs a list of data regarding fax.PurposeTo check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the fax.Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be output.
The selected list is output.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionSETTING Outputs a list of software switches, self telephone number, confiden-
tial boxes, ROM versions and other information.ACTION Outputs a list of error history, transmission line details and other infor-
mation.SELF ST Outputs a list of settings in maintenance mode (own-status report)
regarding fax only.PROTOCOL Outputs a list of transmission procedures.1-T. ECM Outputs a list of ECM settings for one-touch dialing.
1-3-24
3KK
U650 Setting the system 1DescriptionMakes settings for fax reception regarding the sizes of the fax paper and received images and automatic print-ing of the protocol list.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnificationSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when recording the data at 100% magnification. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, they are recorded on the next page.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Increase the setting if a blank second page is received, and decrease it if the received image does not include the entire transmitted data.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction modeSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over-reduced and too much trailing edge margin is left. Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionCUT LINE (100%) Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.CUT LINE (AUTO) Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the
auto reduction mode.CUT LINE (A4) Sets the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, let-
ter) in the auto reduction mode.RX WIDTH 11" Sets the recording width for inch specifications.PROTOCOL PRT Sets the automatic printing of the protocol list.
Description Setting range Default setting Change in valueper step
Number of lines to be ignoredwhen receiving at 100%
0 to 22 3 16 lines
Description Setting range Default setting Change in valueper step
Number of lines to be ignoredwhen receiving in the auto reduction mode
0 to 22 0 16 lines
1-3-25
3KK
U650(cont.)
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction modeSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or letter-size paper under the conditions below.If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.With A4R present and folio absent in the drawersWith letter-size paper present and legal-size paper absent in the drawers
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over-reduced and too much trailing edge margin is left. Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the recording width for inch specificationsSets the maximum recording width and processing method when 11" width fax paper is loaded on an inch specification machine.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the automatic printing of the protocol listSets if the protocol list is automatically printed out.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Description Setting range Default setting Change in valueper step
Number of lines to be ignored when receiv-ing a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction mode
0 to 22 0 16 lines
Display Description1: 11 x 17 Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as A3 width and
records at 100% magnifications.2: B4 Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as B4 width.
Display Description1: OFF The protocol list is not printed out automatically.2: ERROR The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication only
if a communication error occurs.3: ON The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication.
1-3-26
3KK
U651 Setting the system 2DescriptionSets the variation range in rotation reception and the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the variations range in rotation receptionSets the maximum number of lines to be ignored when the received data exceeds the acceptable number of lines in the rotation reception mode. If the number of excessive lines is smaller than the set value, those lines are ignored and rotation reception is performed; if it is larger than the set value, rotation reception is not per-formed.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Even if rotation reception fails, it can be enabled by increasing this value, however, some parts of the received image may not be printed.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reductionSets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is setSets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is setSets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionROTAT. RX ERR Sets the variation range in the auxiliary scanning direction for rotation
reception.ADJ LINES Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.ADJ LINES (A4) Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4
paper is set.ADJ LINES (LT) Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when let-
ter size paper is set.
Description Setting range Default settingNumber of variation lines in the auxiliary scanning direction 0 to 255 3
Description Setting range Default settingNumber of adjustment lines for automatic reduction 0 to 22 7
Description Setting range Default settingNumber of adjustment lines for automatic reductionwhen A4 paper is set
0 to 22 22
Description Setting range Default settingNumber of adjustment lines for automatic reductionwhen letter 0 to 22 7
1-3-27
3KK
U660 Setting the system (communication 2)DescriptionMakes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication.PurposeTo reduce transmission errors when a low quality line is used.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2Sets the signal checking time as a criterion for a received TCF signal.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric key to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the short protocol transmissionSets if short protocol transmission is performed.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the reception of a short protocol transmissionSelects whether to receive or ignore transmission using short protocol.If a short protocol transmission is received when an auto switching device is attached to the machine, commu-nication problems, including auto switching inability, sometimes occur. Change the setting to ignore short pro-tocol transmission to prevent such problems.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionTCF CHECK 2 Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2.SHORT PRTCOL. TX Sets the short protocol transmission.SHORT PRTCOL. RX Sets the reception of short protocol transmission.NUMBER of CNG (F/T) Sets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode.1TOUCH ECM Turns ECM for one-touch dialing on/off.
Display Description1: LONG Checks for 1.0 s.2: SHORT Checks for 0.8 s.
Display Description1: ON Short protocol transmission is performed.2: OFF Short protocol transmission is not performed.
Display Description1: ON Receives short protocol transmission.2: OFF Ignores short protocol transmission.
1-3-28
3KK
U660(cont.)
Setting the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select modeSets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting ECM for each one-touch keyTurns ECM on/off for each one-touch key.
1. Enter a registered two-digit one-touch key number and press the start key.2. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
3. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for entering a one-touch key number is displayed.To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key at the screen for entering a one-touch key number.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display Description1: 1 TIME Detects CNG once.2: 2 TIMES Detects CNG twice.
Display Description1: ON ECM communication is performed for all one-touch keys.2: OFF Disables the ECM for one-touch keys.
1-3-29
3KK
U670 Setting the system (communication 3)DescriptionMakes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication.PurposeTo reduce transmission errors when a low quality line is used.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The screen for the selected item appears.
Enabling/disabling V.34 communicationSets whether V.34 communication is enabled/disabled for transmission and reception.
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz)Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3200 Hz)Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3200 Hz is used.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3000 Hz)Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3000 Hz is used.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionV.34 MODEM Enables or disables V.34 communication.V.34-3429Hz Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).V.34-3200Hz Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3200 Hz).V.34-3000Hz Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3000 Hz).V.34-2800Hz Sets the V.34 symbol speed (2800 Hz).
Display Description1: ON V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.2: TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.3: RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.4: OFF V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.
Display Description1: ON V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.2: OFF V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.
Display Description1: ON V.34 symbol speed 3200 Hz is used.2: OFF V.34 symbol speed 3200 Hz is not used.
Display Description1: ON V.34 symbol speed 3000 Hz is used.2: OFF V.34 symbol speed 3000 Hz is not used.
1-3-30
3KK
U670(cont.)
Setting the V.34 symbol speed (2800 Hz)Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 2800 Hz is used.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U680 Displaying the fax board ROM versionDescriptionDisplays the version of the ROM on the fax control PWB.PurposeTo check the version of the ROM on the fax control PWB.Method
1. Press the start key. The version of the ROM on the fax control PWB is displayed.CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U882 Setting the software switchesDescriptionSets the software switches on the fax control PWB individually.PurposeUse to change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs. Since the commu-nication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be changed.Method
1. Press the start key.2. Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the start key.3. Use numeric keys 7 to 0 to switch each bit between 0 and 1.4. Press the start key to set the value.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display Description1: ON V.34 symbol speed 2800 Hz is used.2: OFF V.34 symbol speed 2800 Hz is not used.
1-3-31
3KK
U882(cont.)
List of Software Switches of Which the Setting Can Be Changed<System setting>
<Machine default>
<Communication setting>
Maintenanceitem No. Description
No. Bit Item10 0 One-touch name and telephone number display on the destination check screen14 5 Communication end buzzer after reception16 1 Ringer frequency detection method17 0 Top-bottom inversion in duplex reception19 7 F code check in NW-FAX reception
6 Transfer of polling-received originals to PC5 Resolution in TIFF files4 Specifying phone number to a PC file name
22 3 Automatic protocol list output at busy time23 6 Output of activity reports on condition
21 Debug information report output format24 5 Recovery of transmission mode after end of fax operation
3 Prohibition of split of standard size21 Declaration of reception size in automatic paper source selection for fax0 Declaration of reception size in setting declaration based on the status of cassettes
33 76543210 Number of adjustment lines in PDF files
No. Bit Item66 765 Selection of scanning density67 654 Selection of reception mode
No. Bit Item90 0 TAD reception connection91 0 Prohibiting manual fax reception
1-3-32
3KK
U882(cont.)
List of Software Switches of Which the Setting Can Be Changed<Communication control procedure>
<Communication time setting>
Maintenanceitem No. Description
No. Bit Item101 2 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 17)
1 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 29)0 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 27ter)
106 7654 Coding format in transmission3210 Coding format in reception
107 5 33600 bps/V344 31200 bps/V343 28800 bps/V342 26400 bps/V341 24000 bps/V340 21600 bps/V34
108 7 19200 bps/V346 16800 bps/V345 14400 bps/V344 12000 bps/V343 9600 bps/V342 7200 bps/V341 4800 bps/V340 2400 bps/V34
111 3 FSK detection in V.8112 6 CNG transmission stop condition
2 FIF length in transmission of more than 4 times of DIS/DTC signal0 Automatic reception level adjustment (V. 33)
113 76543210 Adjustment width in automatic reception level adjustment
No. Bit Item123 76543210 T3 timeout setting124 76543210 T4 timeout setting (automatic equipment)125 76543210 T5 timeout setting130 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal133 76543210 T0 timeout setting (manual equipment)134 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception136 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo137 76543210 Timeout 2 in countermeasures against echo138 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
1-3-33
3KK
U882(cont.)
List of Software Switches of Which the Setting Can Be Changed<Modem setting>
<NCU setting>
<Calling time setting>
<Experimental modem setting>
Maintenanceitem No. Description
No. Bit Item155 76543210 RTH offset (lower byte)156 76543210 RTH offset (upper byte)
No. Bit Item161 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern162 7654 Busy tone detection pattern
1 Busy tone detection in automatic FAX/TEL switching165 76543210 Access code registration for connection to PSTN166 7654 FAX/TEL automatic switching ringback tone ON/OFF cycle167 10 Pseudo-ringer duty ratio
No. Bit Item174 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time175 76543210 DTMF signal pause time182 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (minimum)183 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (maximum)184 76543210 Ringer ON time detection185 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection186 76543210 Ringer OFF non-detection time188 76543210 Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)189 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time192 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the DC circuit195 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time
No. Bit Item596 76543210 Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH L) lower part597 76543210 Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH L) upper part598 76543210 Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH U) lower part599 76543210 Experimental tone detector level judgment (for CNG only: THRESH U) upper part
1-3-34
3KK
U894 Performing board testDescriptionPerforms tests on the DRAM (image memory, bitmap memory) and optional memory on the fax control PWB.PurposeTo check if reading and writing are performed correctly in respective installed memories.Start
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
The test executes.
Performing test on DRAM1. Press the start key. The screen displays the test results as follows.
When the test result is OK:
If the test result is NG:
********: addressIMG: DRAM (image memory) errorB.M: DRAM (bitmap memory) errorTo return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Performing test on optional memory1. Press the start key. The screen displays the test results as follows.
When the test result is OK:
XXMB: Capacity of the option memory which is installed
If the test result is NG:
********: address
If the test result is NG (memory is not installed):
If the test result is NG (memory which does not have compatibility is installed):
To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionBOARD MEMORY Performs tests on SRAM and DRAM.BOARD OP. MEM Performs tests on optional memory.
TEST MEMORY
OK
TEST MEMORY
NG IMG 0x********
TEST OPTION MEMORY
OK XXMB
TEST OPTION MEMORY
NG XXMB 0x********
TEST OPTION MEMORY
NG
TEST OPTION MEMORY
INVALID MEMORY-TYPE
1-3-35
3KK
U894(cont.)
CompletionIf the test result is OK, press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.If the test result is NG, reset by turning the main power switch off and on.
U917 Setting backup data reading/writingDescriptionStores backup data from the fax control PWB into CompactFlash or reads the data from CompactFlash.PurposeTo store and write data when replacing the PWB.Setting
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the power indicator has gone off, switch off the main power switch.Disconnect the power plug.
2. Open the interface cover.3. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine.4. Connect the power plug and turn the main power switch on.5. Enter the maintenance item.6. Press the start key.7. Select the item.
8. Press the start key. Reading or writing is executed, and the screen displays the result.
If the operation was successful:EXECUTE 0100CHECK SUM ****CODE 0000If the operation failed:EXECUTE 0100CHECK SUM ****CODE XXXXWhere XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure.See Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 on P.1-3-37.
9. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the power indicator has gone off, switch off the main power switch.Disconnect the power plug.
10. Remove the Compact Flash from the machine.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Display DescriptionSRAM -> CF : FAX BACKUP Writing the backup data of fax control PWBCF -> SRAM : FAX BACKUP Reading the backup data of fax control PWBSRAM -> CF : FAX DIAL INFO Writing the backup data of fax dial informationCF -> SRAM : FAX DIAL INFO Reading the backup data of fax dial information
1-3-36
3KK
U917(cont.)
Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926
Maintenanceitem No. Description
Code Description0102 Detects call for service on fax control PWB.0103 Detects call for service on engine PWB.0104 Communication error.0105 Detects call for service on main PWB.01FF CF error.0202 No CF card.0203 No data in CF card.0204 CF data is incompatible.0205 Bad CF data (Checksum error)0206 CF read error.0207 CF write error.0212 Fax control PWB flash memory error.
1-3-37
3KK
U926 Rewriting FAX programDescriptionDownloads the fax program and fax fonts.PurposeTo run when upgrading the fax program and fax fonts.Setting
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the power indicator has gone off, switch off the main power switch.Disconnect the power plug.
2. Open the interface cover.3. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine.4. Connect the power plug and turn the main power switch on.5. Enter the maintenance item.6. Press the start key.7. Select FAX PROGRAM/FONT. Check that EXECUTE is displayed and then press the start key.
Downloading of the fax program starts and the result shown below is displayed.
If the operation was successful:EXECUTE 0100CHECK SUM ****CODE 0000
If the operation failed:EXECUTE 0100CHECK SUM ****CODE XXXXWhere XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure.
8. Then, downloading of the fax fonts starts and the result shown below is displayed.
If the operation was successful:EXECUTE 0100CHECK SUM ****CODE 0000
If the operation failed:EXECUTE 0100CHECK SUM ****CODE XXXXWhere XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure.See Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 on P.1-3-37.
9. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the power indicator has gone off, switch off the main power switch.Disconnect the power plug.
10. Remove the Compact Flash from the machine.
Maintenanceitem No. Description
1-3-38
3KK
1-3-2 System settingsIn addition to a maintenance function, the machine is equipped with a system settings which can be operated by users (mainly by the machine administrator). In this machine system settings, default settings can be changed.
(1) Executing a system setting item
Press System Menu/Counter key.
Press [FAX Default].
Start
Execute the fax default setting item
(P.1-3-40).
Fax default setting
End
Press [Close].
Press Reset key.
Press Fax key.
Select [Register] screen.
Start
Registration (P.1-3-42)
Resistration
End
1-3-39
3KK
(2) Fax default
Line Type setting (Inch version only)Set the type of phone line here to correspond to the type of telephone service.
1. Select [Line Type] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Tone Line (DTMF)] or [Pulse Line (10PPS)].
TTI settingSelect whether or not that TTI information will be sent to the receiving party's fax, and whether it will be printed inside or outside the border of the transmitted page.
1. Select [TTI] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Outside page], [Inside page] or [Not Printed].
Print Report setting1. Select [Print Report] using the cursor up/down keys
and press [Change #].2. Activity Report: Press either [On] or [Off].
Transmission Report: Press either [On], [Output on condition] or [Off].Reception Report: Press either [On], [Output on condition] or [Off].Delayed Communication Report: Press either [On] or [Off].Restricted Access Report: Press either [On] or [Off].NW-FAX Transmission Report: Press either [On], [Output on condition] or [Off].
Turning TX/RX Restriction ON/OFFYou can select to only allow fax transmission to those destinations that are registered in your address book and those registered as Permit Fax Numbers. You can also select to only allow fax reception from those facsimiles that are registered in your address book and those regis-tered as Permit Fax Numbers, or to reject those recep-tions from facsimiles registered as Reject Fax Numbers.
1. Select [TX/RX Restriction] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Send: Press either [Adr.Book + PermitList] or [No Restriction].Receive: Press either [Adr.Book + PermitList], [Reject List] or [No Restriction].
Turning Fax Forwarding ON/OFFTo use Fax Forwarding, it is necessary to turn it ON in advance.
1. Select [Fax forwarding] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [On] or [Off].
Bulletin Board settingEnter documents into memory once and they will be available for transmission to any number of receiving par-ties upon receipt of their polling request.
1. Select [Bulletin Board] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Save doc. after Tx] or [Del. doc. after Tx].If you select [Del. doc. after Tx], the documents to be deleted from memory after they are transmitted once. If you select [Save doc. after Tx], the docu-ments will remain in memory waiting for the next polling request even after they are transmitted.
Number of Rings settingThe number of times the fax will [ring] before an incoming call is answered in the Auto Fax Reception mode, the Auto FAX/TEL Switching mode [this setting is not avail-able in metric models] or the TAD Reception mode can be set here to any number between 1 and 15.
1. Select [# of Rings] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Select the number of rings before an incoming call is answered in each mode using the [+] or [-] key.Setting rangeAuto Fax Reception mode: 1 to 15Auto FAX/TEL Switching mode (this setting is not available in metric models): 0 to 15TAD Reception mode: 1 to 15
Volume settingThe volume of the alarm, the monitor and the speaker can be adjusted, or you can make the alarm inaudible.
1. Select [Set Volume (Set the sound volume)] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Select the desired alarm volume.Buzzer Volume: Press either [Large], [Small] or [Off].Monitor Volume: Press either [Large], [Medium], [Small] or [Off].Speaker Volume: Press either [Large], [Medium], [Small] or [Off].
Number of Redials settingSets the number of times the fax will automatically attempt to redial a number when the other party's fax line is busy or some other trouble occurs with the connection.
1. Select [Retry Times] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Select the desired number of redial attempts using the [+] or [-] key.Setting range: 0 to 14
1-3-40
3KK
Scan from DP settingSelect whether documents that are set in the Document Processor will be scanned as 8 1/2 x 11" [A4R] or other such standard size paper, or as long documents (in the direction of the paper feed).
1. Select [Doc. P. (Doc. P. scanning)] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Standard size] or [Long original (Long orig.)].NOTE: It is necessary to select [Standard size] when transmitting both sides of duplex (2-sided) documents.If you select [Long original (Long orig.)], it will not be possible to have documents rotated for trans-mission.
TX Mode/Default settingSelect which transmission mode, Memory Transmission or Direct Feed Transmission, will be the default setting in this fax.
1. Select [TX Mode/Default] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Memory TX] or [Dir. Feed Tx].
Receive Mode settingSelect the automatic reception mode.
1. Select [Receive Mode (Reception mode)] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Fax Reception (Fax Rx)], [Auto Fax/Tel. SW] or [D.R.D.].[D.R.D.] will not be displayed in the metric version.
3. When selecting [D.R.D.], select the desired ring pattern.
RX Date/Time settingSelect whether or not you want information to be printed out at the top edge of received documents.
1. Select [RX Date/Time] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [On] or [Off].
Fax Paper Feeding Tray settingSelect from among the three available modes for feeding paper to print out all documents that are received when the fax is in the fax operation mode.
1. Select [Fax pap. feeding tray (Fax paper tray)] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Auto Select (Auto sel.)], [Fix Size (Fixed size)] or [Fixed Cassette].When selecting [Fix Size (Fixed size)], select the paper size and cassette.When selecting [Fixed Cassette], select the cas-sette.
MP Tray settingSelect here whether or not to use the MP tray to feed paper for printing received faxes.
1. Select [MP tray feeding] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [On] or [Off].
2 in 1 RX setting1. Select [2 in 1 RX] using the cursor up/down keys
and press [Change #].2. Press either [On] or [Off].
Duplex RX settingWhen the width of each page received is exactly the same, the documents will be printed onto the front and back sides of that size of paper.
1. Select [Duplex RX (2-sided RX)] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [On] or [Off].
Registering the Network FAX Reception SettingsTurn this setting ON in order to perform Network FAX Reception.
1. Select [Network FAX reception] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [On] or [Off].3. When selecting [On], select whether to print out the
documents received with this machine or not by pressing either [On] or [Off].
Adding Information to the NW-FAX File NameSet the order of the information that will be added to the NW-FAX file name which is created for NW-FAX Trans-mission/Reception.
1. Select [NW-FAX File Add.Info.] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Date/Time + Fax #] or [Fax # + Date/Time].
Turning the Save Transmitted Documents Function ON/OFFSelect whether to save the transmitted documents on the server computer (the computer on which the provided Scanner File Utility is installed) or not.
1. Select [Save Tx. original] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [On] or [Off].
Selecting the File TypeSelect the file type in which the documents for transmis-sion, or of received documents, will be saved in the server computer (the computer on which the provided Scanner File Utility is installed).
1. Select [File Format (File type)] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [PDF] or [TIFF].
Remote Diagnosis settingSet to take advantage of our remote diagnosis system.
1. Select [Remote Diag. (Remote diagn.)] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [On] or [Off].
Reception Size settingSet whether receive faxes at the same size or a reduced size.
1. Select [Reception size] using the cursor up/down keys and press [Change #].
2. Press either [Reduce Priority] or [Manual Priority].
1-3-41
3KK
(3) Registration
Registering New One-Touch KeysRegister destination fax (telephone) numbers and names under one-touch keys.
1. Press [Dial].2. Press an unregistered speed-dial key on the touch
panel.3. Press [One-touch key].4. Enter the fax number to register under that one-
touch key using the numeric keys. (Maximum 32 digits)
5. Press [Next].6. Enter the name of the other party. (Maximum 20
characters)7. Check the registered information.8. To perform more detailed settings like selecting the
transmission speed, or designating this one-touch key for F-Code Based Communication or Encrypted Transmission, press [Setting].
9. Select the desired transmission speed from among those available: 33600bps, 14400bps and 9600bps.
10. To designate this key for F-Code Based Communi-cation, press [Subaddress Tx].To designate this key for Encrypted Transmission, go directly to step 13.To register this one-touch key with the entered information as is, press [Close] and proceed directly to step 15.
11. To use this key for F-Code Based Communication, press [On].Enter the desired subaddress and F-Code pass-word using the numeric keys. (Maximum 20 digits)
12. Press [Close] twice and then go directly to step 15.13. To designate this key for Encrypted Transmission,
press [Encryption TX (Encryption)].To use this key for Encrypted Transmission, press [On].Enter the 2-digit key code (01 - 20) using the numeric keys.Press [Encryption box #] and then enter the number of thedestination party's Encryption Box using the numeric keys.
14. Press [Close] twice.15. Press [OK].
Registering New Chain Dial KeysRegister chain numbers and names under one-touch keys.
1. Press [Dial].2. Press an unregistered speed-dial key on the touch
panel.3. Press [Chain].4. Enter the desired chain dial number using the
numeric keys. (Maximum 32 digits)5. Press [Next].6. Enter the desired name for the chain dial key. (Max-
imum 20 characters)7. Check the registered information.8. Press [OK].
Registering New Group Dial KeysRegister multiple destination fax (telephone) numbers and names under a one-touch key for group dialing.
1. Press [Dial].2. Press an unregistered speed-dial key on the touch
panel.3. Press [Group].4. Enter the other party's fax numbers.5. Press [Finish dest. Set (Dest. set)].6. Enter the desired group name and press [Next].
(Maximum 20 characters)7. Check the currently registered information.8. Press [OK].
Program KeysRegister frequently used communication modes or fax numbers under one-touch keys.
1. Press [Dial].2. Press an unregistered speed-dial key on the touch
panel.3. Press [Program].4. To designate a time of day for the operation to
begin, press [Off] under [Delayed TX] and go directly to step 6.
5. Enter the desired time of day for the operation to begin using the numeric keys.
6. Press [Send] or [RX Polling] to choose the type of transmission.
7. Press [Next].8. Enter the destination fax number.9. Press [Finish dest. Set (Dest. set)].10. Enter a name for the program and press [Next].
(Maximum 20 characters)11. Check the currently registered information.12. Press [OK].
Registering the Information Identifying Your Facsim-ile (Location Info. setting)Register information identifying your station (fax number, station name and station ID).
1. Press [Location Info.].2. To register your fax number: Press [ ] key and go
to step 3.To register your station name: Press [Own Name] and go directly to step 4.To register your station ID: Press [Own ID] and pro-ceed directly to step 5.
3. Enter your fax number using the numeric keys.The fax number can be up to 20 digits in length.Press [OK].
4. Enter the desired name for your station.The station name can be up to 32 characters Press [End].
5. Enter the desired station ID (4 digits) using the numeric keys.
6. Press [Confirm].
1-3-42
3KK
Setting the Current Date and TimeSet the date and the time that will appear in the message display.
1. Press [Date & Time].2. Enter the present date, in order of the month, day
and year (day, month and year) using the numeric keys.
3. Press [Time] and then enter the present time using the numeric keys.The time should be entered on a 24-hour basis (00:00 - 23:29).
4. Press [Confirm].
Registering New F-Code Confidential BoxesRegister subaddress confidential boxes for subaddress-based confidential communication. Up to 100 boxes can be registered.
1. Press [Box].2. Press [Subaddress confi. box (Subaddr. confid.
box)].3. Press an unregistered key.4. Enter the subaddress 4-digit using the numeric
keys.5. Press [Password] and enter the 4-digit F-Code
password.6. To use the NW-FAX Reception function, press
either [On] or [Off].7. Press [Confirm].8. Press [Close].
Registering New F-Code Relay BoxesRegister subaddress relay box for subaddress-based relay broadcast communication. Up to 15 boxes can be registered.
1. Press [Box].2. Press [Subaddress relay box].3. Press an unregistered key.4. Enter the subaddress 4-digit using the numeric
keys.5. Press [Password] and enter the 4-digit F-Code
password.6. Press [Next].7. Enter the fax number of a final destination. (Max.
300 destinations)If you entered the fax number with the numeric keys, press [Next destinat. (Next dest.)].
8. Press [Finish dest. Set (Dest. set)].9. Select whether or not you want the received docu-
ments to be printed out at your fax : Press either [On] or [Off].Select whether or not to send a Transmission Report regarding the results of the final transmis-sions to the initial transmitting station: Press either [On] or [Off].
10. Press [Next].When selecting [Off] under [Return report], proceed directly to step 13.
11. Enter the fax number of the initial transmitting sta-tion using the numeric keys, one-touch keys and Chain dial keys.
12. Press [Finish dest. Set (Dest. set)].13. Check the registered information.14. Press [Close].
Registering New Encryption BoxesRegister encryption boxes for receiving encrypted trans-missions. Up to 15 boxes can be registered.
1. Press [Box].2. Press [Encryption box].3. Press an unregistered key.4. Enter the 4-digit number using the numeric keys.5. Press [Box. ID] and enter the 4-digit number.6. Press [Encryption Code (Encr. code)] and enter the
2-digit Key Code (01 - 20) using the numeric keys.7. Select whether or not you want documents
received into this Encryption Box to be automati-cally printed out.Press either [On] or [Off] under [Print on RX.].To use the NW-FAX Reception function, press [On].
8. Press [Confirm].9. Press [Close].
Registering New Permit Fax NumbersRegister the password (permit fax number) for password check communication.
1. Press [TX/RX Restrict.].2. Press [Permit Fax No.].3. Press an unregistered key.4. Enter the desired Permit Fax Number using the
numeric keys. (Maximum 20 digits)5. Press [OK].6. Press [Close].
Registering New Permit IdsRegister the password (permit IDs) for password check communication.
1. Press [TX/RX Restrict.].2. Press [Permit ID No.].3. Press an unregistered key.4. Enter the desired 4-digit Permit ID using the
numeric keys.5. Press [Confirm].6. Press [Close].
Registering New Reject Fax NumbersRegister up to 5 numbers as Reject Fax Numbers.
1. Press [TX/RX Restrict.].2. Press [Reject FAX No.].3. Press an unregistered key.4. Enter the desired Reject Fax Number using the
numeric keys. (Maximum 20 digits)5. Press [OK].6. Press [Close].
1-3-43
3KK
Registering the Fax Forwarding InformationRegister the destination and designated hours for fax for-warding.
1. Press [Fax Forwarding].2. Enter the fax number of the destination fax number
using the numeric keys, abbreviated numbers, one-touch keys or chain dial keys.
3. Press [Finish dest. Set (Dest. set)].4. Select whether or not you want the received docu-
ments to be printed out at your fax.Press either [On] or [Off] under [Print Here].
5. Select whether or not you want to designate a time for the Fax Forwarding operation to begin and end.Press either [Delayed TX] or [All Day] under [Fax For'd].
6. When selecting [Delayed TX], enter the desired time for Fax Forwarding to begin using the numeric keys.
7. Press [Shut-off Time] and enter the desired time for Fax Forwarding to end using the numeric keys.
8. Press [Next].9. Check that information.10. Press [OK].
Changing the Remote Switching NumberChange the remote switching number, which is set to 55 at the factory, for receiving faxes using the telephone connected to the machine.
1. Press [Remote SW dial].2. Enter the new Remote Switching Number using the
numeric keys (2 digits).3. Press [Confirm].
Registering the Remote Test IDRegister the designated remote test ID for remote diag-nosis.
1. Press [Remote Test ID].2. Enter the designated 4-digit Remote Test ID using
the numeric keys.3. Press [Confirm].
Registering New Encryption KeysRegister a 16-digit cipher key password for encrypted communication.
1. Press [Encryption key].If Restricted Access is turned OFF, go to the next step. If Restricted Access is turned ON, proceed directly to step 3.
2. Enter the currently registered administrator number using the numeric keys.
3. Press an unregistered key.4. Create the desired 16-character Encryption Key
using the numerals (0 - 9) and the English alphabet (A - Z) on the touch panel.
5. Press [OK].6. Press [Close].
Registering the Network FAX InformationFile name (Transmission/Reception): For registering the default file name when documents which have been transmitted or received using the Network FAX functions are saved in the designated folder.
1. Press [Network FAX].2. Press [File name].3. To register the file name for received faxes, press
[NetworkFAX Rx. (NW-FAX RX)].To register the file name for transmitted faxes, press [Save Tx. original].
4. Enter the desired name using the English alphabet, numerals or other available symbols. (Maximum 13 digits)
5. Press [Close].
IP address / Host name: For registering the IP address or host name of the server computer in which documents which have been sent or received using the Network FAX functions are saved. In this case, the Scanner File Utility needs to be installed.
1. Press [Network FAX].2. Press [IP addr./Host name].3. Enter the IP address (numerals) or the host name
using the English alphabet or numerals. (Maximum 32 digits)
4. Press [Close].
Administrator's e-mail address: For registering the e-mail address of the computer to be notified in case of an error, as well as where to send Transmission and Reception Reports. Also registers the account name and password for SMTP authorization in order to increase security in e-mail transmission.
1. Press [Network FAX].2. Press [Admin. E-mail ad.].3. Press [Admin. E-mail ad.].4. Enter the administrator's e-mail address using the
English alphabet, numerals or other available sym-bols. (Maximum 64 digits)
5. Press [End].6. Press [Account].7. Enter the account name using the English alphabet,
numerals or other available symbols. (Maximum 64 digits)
8. Press [End].9. Press [Password].10. Enter the currently registered administrator number
using the numeric keys.11. Enter the password using the English alphabet,
numerals or other available symbols. (Maximum 31 digits)
12. Press [End].13. Press [Close].
1-3-44
3KK
Save Folder Number: For registering the number of the folder in which documents which have been transmitted or received using the Network FAX functions will be saved.
1. Press [Network FAX].2. Press [Saving Folder No. (No.of save folder)].3. Enter the save folder number using the numeric
keys.4. Press [Save Tx. original] and enter the save folder
number using the numeric keys.5. Press [Enter].6. Press [Close].
1-3-45
3KK
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-3-46
3KK
1-4 Error Codes
1-4-1 Error codes
(1) Error code
Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication U followed by a 5-digit number. (Error codes for V34 communication errors start with an E indication, followed by five digits.)The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause, while the lower two indicate the detailed classification. Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have 00 as the last two digits.
Error code
U X X X X X
Detailed classification of error code
General classification of error code
Error code indication
1-4-1
3KK
(2) Table of general classification
Error code Description
U00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U004XX A connection was made but interrupted during handshake with the receiver unit (refer to page 1-4-4 U004XX error code table).
U00500 Multiple communication was interrupted and call was not made on destination units after interrup-tion.
U006XX Communication was interrupted because of a machine problem (refer to page 1-4-5 U006XX error code table).
U00700 Communication was interrupted because of a problem in the destination unit.
U008XX A page transmission error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 U008XX error code table).
U009XX A page reception error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 U009XX error code table).
U010XX Transmission in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-6 U010XX error code table).
U011XX Reception in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-8 U011XX error code table).
U01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U017XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during transmission in V.34 mode (refer to page 1-4-10 U017XX error code table).
U018XX A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during reception in V.34 mode (refer to page 1-4-10 U018XX error code table).
U02000 Relay broadcast was refused by a relay station because of a mismatch in permit ID number and permit telephone number when a relay command was issued.
U02100 A relay command failed because the destination unit (relay station) had no relay broadcast capa-bility.
U02200 A relay command from a command station failed because a telephone number that was not regis-tered in the relay station was specified. Or, relay broadcast was requested to a relay station but failed because a telephone number that was not registered in the relay station was specified. Or, Subaddress-based relay broadcast transmission failed because the data registered in the Subad-dress relay box was deleted.
U023XX Receiving station information was not normally received in reception of a relay command (refer to page 1-4-10 U023XX error code table).
U02400 An interoffice subaddress-based relay transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified relay box number.
U03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
U03100 In reverse polling, although no original was set in the destination unit, transmission was complete.
U03200 In confidential polling reception, data was not accumulated in the specified box in the destination unit. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, data was not stored in the box specified by the destination unit.
U03300 In polling reception from a unit of our make, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number.
1-4-2
3KK
U03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit is either of our make or by another manufacturer).
U03500 In confidential polling reception, the specified confidential box No. was not registered in the desti-nation. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception, the specified Subaddress con-fidential box number was not registered in the destination unit. Or, the destination was being accessed.
U03600 Confidential polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in specified confidential box No. Or, an interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified subaddress confidential box number.
U03700 Confidential polling reception failed because the destination unit had no confidential polling trans-mission capability or data was not accumulated in any box in the destination unit. Or, interoffice subaddress-based bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no subaddress-based bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any subaddress confidential box in the destination unit.
U04000 The confidential box specified for confidential transmission was not registered in the destination unit. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based transmission mode, the specified subaddress box num-ber was not registered in the destination unit. Or, the destination was being accessed.
U04100 Confidential transmission failed because the destination unit had no confidential capability. Or, subaddress-based transmission failed because the destination unit had no subaddress-based reception capability.
U04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit.
U04300 Encrypted transmission failed because the destination unit had no encrypted communication capability.
U044XX Communication was interrupted because of an encryption key error during encrypted transmission (refer to page 1-4-10 U044XX error code table).
U04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05000 In transmission with a specified number, the set number of originals was different from the number of transmitted originals.
U05100 Password check transmission or restricted transmission was interrupted because the permit ID’s did not agree with.
U05200 Password check reception or restricted reception was interrupted because the permit ID’s did not match, the rejected FAX number’s did match, or the destination receiver did not return its phone number.
U05300 The password check reception or the restricted reception was interrupted because the permitted numbers did not match, the rejected numbers did match, or the machine in question did not acknowledge its phone number.
U09000 G3 communication was attempted but failed because the destination unit was a G2 machine.
U12000 Relay broadcast was requested from a command station but memory overflowed during reception. Or, in subaddress-based relay reception, memory overflowed.
U12100 Relay was commanded but memory overflowed in the destination unit (relay station).
U14000 Memory overflowed during confidential reception. Or, in subaddress-based confidential reception, memory overflowed.
U14100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during confidential transmission. Or, in interoffice sub-address-based transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit during transmission.
U19200 Memory transmission failed because a decoding error occurred.
U19300 Transmission failed because an error occurred during JBIG encoding.
U19400 Reception failed because an error occurred during JBIG decoding.
Error code Description
1-4-3
3KK
(2-1) U004XX error code table: Interrupted phase B
Error code Description
U00420 A relay request was received from the host center but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number.
U00421 Subaddress-based relay reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified subad-dress relay box number.
U00430 Polling request (confidential or reverse) was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit number. Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but inter-rupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit.
U00431 Confidential polling transmission was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was not registered. Or, an subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified subaddress confidential box was not registered.
U00432 Confidential polling transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in confidential box ID number. Or, an subaddress-based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because of a mis-match in Subaddress confidential box numbers.
U00433 Confidential polling request was received but data was not present in the confidential box. Or, sub-address-based bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the subaddress confidential box.
U00434 Confidential polling request was received but interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was intended for encryption.
U00435 Confidential polling request was received but interrupted because the specified confidential box was being accessed. Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because the specified subaddress confidential box was being accessed.
U00440 Confidential reception was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was not regis-tered. Or, subaddress-based confidential reception or subaddress-based relay reception was interrupted because the specified subaddress box was not registered. Or, subaddress based con-fidential reception or subaddress relay command reception was interrupted because the specified subaddress box No. was being accessed.
U00441 Confidential reception was interrupted because the specified confidential box No. was intended for encryption.
U00450 The destination transmitter disconnected because the permit ID’s did not agree with while the des-tination transmitter is in password-check transmission or restricted transmission.
U00460 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not regis-tered. Or, encrypted reception request was received but interrupted because the specified encryp-tion box was being accessed.
U00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box was not registered.
1-4-4
3KK
(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit
(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error
(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error
Error code Description
U00600 The document processor cover is open.
U00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00602 Image scanning section problem.
U00603 No document feed.
U00604 Document length exceeded the limit of the bitmap memory capacity.
U00610 Recording section cover is open.
U00611 Recording paper JAM
U00613 Image writing section problem
U00614 Nearly empty of recording paper
U00615 Empty of recording paper
U00620 Copier fixing unit problem
U00622 Copier drive motor problem
U00655 CTS was not activated after RTS due to a modem error.
U00656 Data was not transmitted after CTS was activated due to a modem error.
U00670 Power was cut off during communication.
U00677 There was no file to transmit in the memory transmission mode.
U00690 System error.
Error code Description
U00800 A page transmission error occurred because of reception of a RTN or PIN signal.
U00810 A page transmission error reoccurred after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
Error code Description
U00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U00910 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
1-4-5
3KK
(2-5) U010XX error code table: G3 transmission
Error code Description
U01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps. Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at 2400 bps.
U01001 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DIS signal.
U01010 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01011 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded.
U01012 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01013 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal, and the preset num-ber of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01014 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded.
U01015 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded.
U01016 An MCF signal was received but no DIS signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal, and T1 timeout was detected.
U01017 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded.
U01018 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded.
U01019 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01020 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal, and the preset number of com-mand retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01021 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01022 No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal, and the preset number of com-mand retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01023 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.NULL signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01024 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.MPS signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01025 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01026 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal, and the preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01027 No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal, and the preset num-ber of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01028 T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).
U01040 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during standby for DIS signal reception.
U01041 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal (between units of our make).
U01042 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal.
1-4-6
3KK
U01043 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal (between units of our make).
U01044 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal (between units of our make).
U01045 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal.
U01046 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal.
U01047 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal.
U01048 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal.
U01049 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal (between units of our make).
U01050 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal (ECM).
U01051 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal (ECM).
U01052 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal (ECM).
U01053 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal (ECM).
U01054 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.MPS signal (ECM).
U01055 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal (ECM).
U01056 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal (ECM).
U01057 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal (ECM).
U01070 Polarity reversal was detected during handshake.
U01071 Polarity reversal was detected during message transmission.
U01072 A break in loop current was detected during transmission.
U01073 During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the receiver unit, a CM signal was not detected when trans-mitting after reception.
U01080 A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal.
U01091 During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because a PPR signal was received over 10 times even after reducing the communication speed to the minimum with the symbol speed maintained at the level of connection.
U01092 During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because of an impossible com-bination of the symbol speed and communication speed.
Error code Description
1-4-7
3KK
(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception
Error code Description
U01100 Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal.
U01101 Function of the unit (excl. communication mode select) differs from that indicated by an NSS sig-nal.
U01102 A DTC (NSC) signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit.
U01110 No response after transmission of a DIS signal.
U01111 No response after transmission of a DTC (NSC) signal.
U01112 No training reception after reception of a DCS or NSS signal.
U01113 No response after transmission of an FTT signal.
U01114 No message reception after transmission of a CFR signal.
U01115 No message reception after transmission of an MCF signal.
U01116 No message reception after transmission of a PPR signal.
U01117 No message reception after transmission of a CTR signal.
U01118 No message reception after transmission of an ERR signal.
U01119 No further signals were received after reception of a message.
U01120 No response after transmission of an MCF signal.
U01121 No response after transmission of an RTP signal.
U01122 No response after transmission of an RTN signal.
U01123 No response after transmission of a PIP signal.
U01124 No response after transmission of a PIN signal.
U01125 No response after transmission of a CNS signal (between units of our make).
U01126 No response after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM).
U01127 No response after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM).
U01128 No response after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM).
U01129 No response after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).
U01140 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DIS signal.
U01141 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal.
U01142 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS or NSS signal.
U01143 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal.
U01144 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CFR signal.
U01145 A DCN signal was received after reception of a message.
U01146 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an MCF signal (interoffice communication after reception of an MPS, EOM signal or confidential interoffice communication).
U01147 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTP signal.
U01148 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTN signal.
U01149 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIP signal.
U01150 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIN signal.
U01151 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM).
U01152 A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTR signal (ECM).
U01153 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM).
1-4-8
3KK
U01154 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM).
U01155 A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).
U01160 During message reception, transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time per line.
U01161 Number of error lines exceeded limits during message reception.
U01162 A break in loop current was detected during message reception.
U01163 Polarity reversal was detected during message reception.
U01164 One page length exceeded the specified length during message reception.
U01170 A decoding error occurred during MMR message reception.
U01172 During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the transmitting unit, a JM signal was not detected after transmission of a CM signal when receiving after transmission.
U01191 Communication was interrupted because an error occurred during an image data reception sequence in the V.34 mode.
U01199 A DIS signal with different FIF was received after transmission of a DIS signal.
Error code Description
1-4-9
3KK
(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission
U01700: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before enter-ing phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/A/Abar (B/Bbar, for polling transmission)/INFOh was not detected.U01720: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after initiating the control channel before entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.U01721: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange; 1) a DCN signal was received from the destination unit, and the line was cut; or 2) a DIS (NSF, CSI) signal was received from the destination unit and, in response to the sig-nal, the unit transmitted a DCN signal, and the line was cut.
(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception
U01800: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before entering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/B/Bbar (A/Abar, for polling reception)/probing tone was not detected.U01810: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).For example, S/Sbar/PP/TRN was not detected.U01820: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel before entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.U01821: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination of communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange, a DCN signal was transmitted to the destination unit and the line was cut.
(2-9) U023XX error code table: Relay command abnormal reception
(2-10) U044XX error code table: Encrypted transmission
Error code Description
U01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720 A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).
U01721 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units.
Error code Description
U01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820 A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).
U01821 Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between units.
Error code Description
U02303 Timeout was detected before a correct DNL signal was received.
U02304 A signal other than MPS or EOM signal was received after a DNL signal was received.
Error code Description
U04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04401 Calling failed during encrypted transmission because the encryption key was not registered.
1-4-10
3KK
1-5 Troubleshooting
1-5-1 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem dis-played as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem. A message is also displayedrequesting the user to call for service.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning front cover/feed cover switch off and backon.
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0030 Fax control PWB system problemProcessing with the fax software was disabled due to a hardware or software problem.
Defective fax con-trol PWB.
Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation.
C0070 Abnormal detection of fax control PWB incompatibilityIn the initial communication with the fax control PWB, any normal communication command is not transmitted.
Defective fax soft-ware.
Install the fax software.
Defective fax con-trol PWB.
Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation.
C0280 Communication problem between the fax control PWB and main PWBAfter main PWB status change signal turns on 1 minute, when it does not receive key required command from the fax control PWB, one time it resets the FAX.After that, while main PWB status change signal turns on furthermore 1 minute, when it does not receive key required command from the fax control PWB.When FAX_READY signal continues fake for 6 s, one time it resets the FAX. After that, when FAX_READY fake con-tinues fake for 6 s.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector YC6 on the main PWB and the connector on the fax control PWB, connection of connector YC1 on the fax control PWB and the connector on the fax relay PWB. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation.
C0820 Fax control PWB CG ROM checksum errorA checksum error occurred with the CG ROM data of the fax control PWB.
Defective fax soft-ware.
Install the fax software.
Defective fax con-trol PWB.
Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation.
C0830 Fax control PWB flash program area checksum errorA checksum error occurred with the pro-gram of the fax control PWB.
Defective fax soft-ware.
Install the fax software.
Defective fax con-trol PWB.
Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation.
C0860 Fax control PWB software switch checksum errorA checksum error occurred with the soft-ware switch value of the fax control PWB.
Defective fax soft-ware.
Install the fax software.
Defective fax con-trol PWB.
Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation.
C0870 Fax control PWB to main PWB high capacity data transfer problemHigh-capacity data transfer between the fax control PWB and the scanner MIP PWB was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried 10 times.
Poor contact in the connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connector YC6 on the main PWB and the connector on the fax control PWB. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation.
1-5-1
3KK
C0880 Program archive problemWhen power is turned on, the com-pressed program in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB was not success-fully decompressed.
Defective fax soft-ware.
Install the fax software.
Defective fax con-trol PWB.
Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation.
C0890 Fax control PWB CG FONT archive problemWhen power is turned on, the com-pressed CG font in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB was not success-fully decompressed.
Defective fax soft-ware.
Install the fax software.
Defective fax con-trol PWB.
Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation.
C0920 Fax file system errorThe backup data is not retained for file system abnormality of flash memory of the fax control PWB.
Defective fax con-trol PWB.
Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation.
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1-5-2
3KK
1-5-2 Troubleshooting
ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
An error message is displayed on the computer screen while transmission is performed.Network error has occurred.
A connection error of network scan-ner PWB occurred while data was transmitted.
Connect the network scanner PWB properly.
Communication time out has occurred. A network cable was disconnected while data was transmitted.
Connect the network cables of the computer and the machine properly.
FAX connection has been cut. Transmission failed because data amount (traf-fic) on the network was too large.
Retransmit after a while. Contact the net-work administrator for check.
FAX connection could not be made for the following possible reasons:The FAX main unit isn't turned on.Network FAX address is wrong.A fault has occurred at the FAX machine.
The fax system is not installed.
Install the fax system.
Self diagnostic code C0280 occurred.
Check the connection of the flat cable.
NIC is being initial-ized.
Retransmit after a while.
Self diagnostic code of NIC occurred.
RTC memory is not mounted or connection is not proper. Check the connection.
A network cable is disconnected.
Connect the network cables properly.
The main power switch is OFF.
Turn ON the main power switch.
The IP address or host name is not correct.
Check the IP address and host name regis-tered in the FAX Driver and those registered in the network scanner PWB.
The FAX is in use. Copying is being performed.Fax printing is being performed. Fax setting is being performed.Received originals are being transmit-ted.Remote diagnosis is being performed.Network scanner is being used.Maintenance mode is being performed.
Retransmit after the cause described left is cleared.
FAX memory is full. Fax memory became full while transmission was performed.
Secure memory area. (Delete data in the memory.)Add memory.Retransmit with smaller resolution.Divide originals to be transmitted.
1-5-3
3KK
The number of FAX transmission reservations has reached maximum.
NW-FAX transmis-sion was tried when 50 items of fax transmission was reserved.
After a while (after the number of the reserved items is reduced), retransmit.
The FAX cannot be used. The main power switch is OFF when reception into memory is set.
Turn on the main power switch.
Fax is being reset. Retransmit after clearing reset.
The job has been interrupted at the FAX operation panel.
The interrupt key was pressed while transmission was performed.
Retransmit after interrupt was cleared.
Mail notification relatedTransmission report is not delivered to clients.
NW-FAX transmis-sion of report out-put in the fax initial setting is OFF or to be performed in a special condition.
If the setting is OFF, no report is returned regardless of fax communication result. If a special condition is set, a report is returned when a special event such as fax communi-cation error or broadcast transmission occurs. If a transmission report is needed, turn the setting ON.
A client mail address is not reg-istered in the FAX Driver.
Register the client mail address in the FAX Driver initial setting.
A client mail address registered in the FAX Driver is not correct.
Check the client mail address.
The mail address of the fax adminis-trator or the scan-ner administrator is not registered.
Register the mail address of the fax adminis-trator or the scanner administrator.
The IP address of mail server is not registered in the scanner initial set-ting.
Register the IP address and host name of mail server.
The IP address or host name of mail server registered in the scanner initial setting is not cor-rect.
Check the registered IP address and host name of mail server.
Accounting of a cli-ent mail address is not performed.
Contact the administrator for check.
The mail server is down.
Check the mail server.
The client mail soft-ware has not started.
Start the mail software.
ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1-5-4
3KK
Activity report, restricted access report, power fail-ure report or backup RAM error report is not deliv-ered to the administrator.
NW-FAX reception is OFF in the fax initial setting.
Turn the NW-FAX reception setting ON.
Scanner adminis-trator mail address or fax administrator mail address is not registered.
Register the scanner administrator mail address or the fax administrator mail address.
Scanner adminis-trator mail address or fax administrator mail address is not correct.
Check the administrator mail address.
The IP address or host name of mail server is not regis-tered in the scan-ner initial setting.
Register the IP address and host name of mail server.
The IP address or host name regis-tered in the scan-ner initial setting is not correct.
Check the registered IP address and host name of mail server.
Accounting of an administrator mail address is not per-formed in the mail server.
Contact the administrator for check.
The mail server is down.
Check the mail server.
The administrator mail software has not started.
Start the mail software.
ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1-5-5
3KK
Received originals are not stored. (including recep-tion report)
NW-FAX reception setting is OFF.
Turn NW-FAX reception in the fax initial set-ting ON.
The IP address or host name of stor-age destination computer is not correct.
Check the IP address and host name regis-tered in the fax and those in the storage des-tination computer.
The storage desti-nation computer has not started.
Start the storage destination computer and start the Scanner File Utility.
Transmission failed because data amount (traf-fic) on the network was too large.
Contact the network administrator for check.
Copying is being performed.Fax printing is being performed. Fax setting is being performed.Received originals are being transmit-ted.Network scanner is being used.
Perform automatic retransmission after the cause described left is cleared.
The Scanner File Utility of the stor-age destination computer has not started.
Start the storage destination computer and start the Scanner File Utility.
The network cable is disconnected.
Connect the network cable properly.
The reception folder number is not correct.
Use the reception folder number registered in fax the same as the folder number set in the Scanner File Utility.
The hard disk drive in the storage des-tination computer is full.
Contact the administrator for check.
The Scanner File Utility version does not match.
Upgrade the Scanner File Utility to Ver. 3.X or later.
The reception report of report out-put in the fax initial setting is OFF or to be performed in a special condition.
If the setting is OFF, no report is transmitted regardless of fax communication result. If a special condition is set, a report is transmit-ted when a special event such as fax com-munication error occurs. If a reception report is needed, turn the setting ON.
ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1-5-6
3KK
Address book relatedWhen a CSV file is imported, leading 0 of fax num-bers is deleted.
If a CSV file is edited with Excel, since fax numbers are processed as numerical values, leading 0 is auto-matically deleted.
Edit the CSV file with a text editor.
When a CSV file is imported, the first line is not imported.
The first line of CSV files is pro-cessed as header.
Input item names to indicate the description of each column in the first line of CSV files.
List items are not displayed. The display width is changed by dragging column header in the list. If the display width is 0, the item is not displayed.
Select the position between the column header items and drag so that the item is displayed.
When an address is deleted, the group is deleted. If all addresses of a group are deleted, the group is also deleted.
Resister the group again.
The address book cannot be started. If the address book finishes abnormally because of any reason, the address book infor-mation may remain.
Restart the computer and start the address book.
The toolbar is not displayed. If Toolbar in the View menu is Off, the toolbar is not displayed.
Turn the Toolbar setting of the View menu On.
Although the Toolbar setting in the View menu is On, the toolbar is not displayed.
The toolbar can be docked and placed outside the address book.
Check to see if the toolbar is placed outside the address book.
After scrolling downward, if the cursor is moved upward by one or two, a different destination from the destination decided on the screen is selected.
Fax software ver-sion is earlier.
Upgrade the software.
ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1-5-7
3KK
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-5-8
3KK
2-1 Electrical Parts Layout
2-1-1 Electrical parts layout
Figure 2-1-1
1. Fax control PWB (FCPWB).......................... Modulates, demodulates, compresses, decompresses and smoothes out image data, and converts resolution of image data.
2. NCU PWB (NCUPWB)................................. Controls connection to the telephone line.3. Backup battery (BUBAT).............................. Saves stored image when a power-down occur.4. Speaker (SP)................................................ Outputs buzzer, monitoring and speaker sounds.5. Memory module DIMM................................. Expands memory capacity for image data and bitmap conversion.
(option)6. Fax relay PWB (FRYPWB) .......................... Consists of wiring relay circuits using electrical components.
1
2
3 4
5
6
2-1-1
3KK
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-1-2
3KK
2-2 Operation of the PWBs
2-2-1 Fax control PWB
Figure 2-2-1 Fax control PWB block diagram
ASICU061
SDRAM4M x 16bit x 2(upper/lower)
OptionalmemoryMaximum64 MB
SSCG
LVC
LVC
LVC
Oscillator(44MHz)
Backupcircuit
RTCpowersupply1.9V
Flash memories1M x 16bit x 2(upper/lower)
Modem LSIU074
Analogcircuit
Backupcircuit
NCUPWB
Engine IF(1/2)
Fax control PWB
LVC
CPUU011
(133MHz)
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
1.9V
Data bus
Address bus
5V
5V
5V5V
5V
5V
1.9V
SGND,PGND
24V
5V
12V
12V
12V
5V
12V
24V
12 Vregulator
3.3 Vregulator
1.9 Vregulator
3.3V
3.3V
44MHz
44MHz
44MHz
32bit
32bit
32bit
/FAXSLEEP/WAKEUP
8bit
3.3V
2.4V
Speakercircuit Speaker
LVC
U021
U051
U052
U022
Backupbattery(NiMH)Lithium battery
backup circuitLithiumbattery
RTLOscillator
Connect to the fax relay PWB
Connect to the fax relay PWB
Engine IF(2/2)
2-2-1
3KK
Figure 2-2-2 Fax control PWB silk-screen diagram
YC10
YC
11
YC
3
YC
4
YC
6
YC
1
YC
8
51
1
1
1
22
11
43
9
49
5052
1
3 4
A2
0
B2
0B
19
A1
9
A2
A1
B2
B1
1 2
42
3
YC7
YC
9
59
57
5860
4
1
40
3
YC
2Y
C5
21
22
1 21
3
2-2-2
3KK
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionYC1 A1 _WAKEUPFAX O 3.3/0 V DC _WAKEUPFAX signal
Connected to the fax relay PWB.
A2 _FAXSET I 3.3/0 V DC _FAXSET signalA3 MAIN_RXD O 3.3/0 V DC
(pulse)MAIN_RXD signal
A4 _FAXREADY O 3.3/0 V DC _FAXREADY signal
A5 _SREQ O 3.3/0 V DC _SREQ signal
A6 _FPVD O 3.3/0 V DC _FPVD signal
A7 FVCLK O 3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
FVCLK signal
A8 _FVSYNC O 3.3/0 V DC _FVSYNC signal
A9 FMRE O 3.3/0 V DC FMRE signal
A10 _FPHSYNC - - Not used
A11 FPVCLK - - Not used
A12 FAXSLEEP I 3.3/0 V DC FAXSLEEP signal
A13 _MAINSTS I 3.3/0 V DC _MAINSTS signal
A14 _MMISTS I 3.3/0 V DC _MMISTS signal
A15 MAIN_TXD I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
MAIN_TXD signal
A16 FMIPOUT I 3.3/0 V DC FMIPOUT signal
A17 FOVSYNC I 3.3/0 V DC FOVSYNC signal
A18 _FOHSTHIN I 3.3/0 V DC _FOHSTHIN signal
A19 FMREOUT I 3.3/0 V DC FMREOUT signal
A20 FFOCLK I 3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
FFOCLK signal
B1 PGND - - GroundB2 24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC supplyB3 GND - - GroundB4 GND - - GroundB5 _SETFAX O 3.3/0 V DC _SETFAX signal
B6 GND - - GroundB7 GND - - GroundB8 GND - - GroundB9 PFVSYNC - - Not usedB10 GND - - GroundB11 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC supplyB12 GND - - Ground
B13 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC supplyB14 GND - - GroundB15 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC supplyB16 GND - - GroundB17 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC supplyB18 GND - - GroundB19 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC supplyB20 GND - - Ground
2-2-3
3KK
YC2 1 +12V O 12 V DC +12 V DC power supplyConnected to the NCU PWB.
2 A.G - - Ground3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC supply4 S.G - - Ground
5 EXTRING1 - - Not used6 EXTRING2 - - Not used7 KMUTE O 3.3/0 V DC KMUTE signal
8 SHUNT O 3.3/0 V DC SHUNT signal9 PLSDIL O 3.3/0 V DC
(pulse) Dial pulse signal
10 EARTH O 3.3/0 V DC EARTH signal11 TELSEL O 3.3/0 V DC TELSEL signal12 FAXSEL O 3.3/0 V DC FAXSEL signal13 NCUTYPE2 - Ground*1/
Open*2 Destination identification signal 2
14 NCUTYPE3 - Open*1/Ground*2
Destination identification signal 3
15 _OFFHOOK I 3.3/0 V DC _OFFHOOK signal16 NCUTYPE1 - Open Destination identification signal 117 _ONHOOK1 I 5/0 V DC _ONHOOK1 signal18 _ONHOOK2 I 5/0 V DC _ONHOOK2 signal19 _RNGDET I 3.3/0 V DC
(pulse)Ring signal
20 MODTXD O Analog MODTXD signal21 RXIN I Analog RXIN signal22 MODRXD I Analog MODRXD signal
YC3 1 BEEP O Analog Speaker sound outputConnected to the speaker.
2 AGND - - Ground
YC4 1 +2.4V-NIMH I 2.4 V DC Backup 2.4 V DC power supply inputConnected to the backup bat-tery.
2 GND - - Ground
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
2-2-4
3KK
2-2-2 NCU PWB
Figure 2-2-3 NCU PWB block diagram
Figure 2-2-4NCU PWB silk-screen diagram
Destinationidentification circuit(JP20,21,22)
NCUTYPE
1, 2, 3
K70
K11
K10
_ONHOOK2
_ONHOOK1
RXIN
FAXSEL
MODRXD
MODTXD
SHUNT
PLSDIL
_RNGDET
EARTH
DCCONT
_OFFHOOK
EXTRING1
EXTRING2
TELSEL
LINE1
LINE2
EXTEL1
EXTEL2
TEL L1
TEL L2
N.C.
N.C.
Loop currentdetection/tone signalreception circuit(PC30,PC31)
Accountingpulse eliminationcircuit (T60)
External telephoneoff-hook detection circuit(TR50,TR51,TR52)
Ring signaldetectioncircuit(PC60)
DC loop/dial pulsetransmission circuit(PC80)
Linetransformer(T70)
Polarity switching detection circuit(PC32,PC33)
MCN1MCN24
3
4
3
CN11
2
21
22
2-2-5
3KK
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionYC1 1 RXIN O Analog RXIN signal
Connected to the fax control PWB.
2 MODRXD O Analog MODRXD signal3 _RNGDET O 3.3/0 V DC Ring signal
4 MODTXD I Analog MODTXD signal
5 _ONHOOK1 O 5/0 V DC _ONHOOK1 signal
6 _ONHOOK2 O 5/0 V DC _ONHOOK2 signal
7 _OFFHOOK O 3.3/0 V DC _OFFHOOK signal
8 NCUTYPE1 - Open Destination identification signal 1
9 NCUTYPE2 - Ground*1/Open*2
Destination identification signal 2
10 NCUTYPE3 - Open*1/Ground*2
Destination identification signal 3
11 TELSEL I 3.3/0 V DC TELSEL signal
12 FAXSEL I 3.3/0 V DC FAXSEL signal
13 PLSDIL I 3.3/0 V DC Dial pulse signal
14 EARTH I 3.3/0 V DC EARTH signal
15 DCCONT I 3.3/0 V DC DCCONT signal
16 SHUNT I 3.3/0 V DC SHUNT signal
17 N.C - - Not used
18 N.C - - Not used
19 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC supply
20 GND - - Ground
21 12V I 12 V DC +12 V DC supply22 GND - - Ground
2-2-6